Heidelberg Prinect Signastation

Prinect Signa Station - Reference Prinect Signa Station Reference Edition February 2006 Order No. SZ.111.0482 ABC A...

212 downloads 1447 Views 3MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Prinect Signa Station - Reference

Prinect Signa Station Reference

Edition February 2006 Order No. SZ.111.0482

ABC

ABC

Imprint/Company Address

Copyright © 2006 Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Dr.-Hell-Strasse D-24107 Kiel

Phone +49 (4 31) 3 86-0 Fax +49 (4 31) 3 86-13 80 http://www.heidelberg.com/

Heidelberg®, Heidelberg GTO 46®, GTO 52®, M-Offset®, SM 52®, SM 74® and SP 72® are registered trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002

No part of this book may be reproduced without prior written permission. ............................................................................................. Acrobat®, Adobe®, the Acrobat logo, Adobe Illustrator®, Adobe® Type Manager®, PageMaker®, Photoshop® and PostScript® are registered trademarks, Extreme™, OPI™ and TIFF™ are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Adobe, the Clearly Adobe Imaging logo, PostScript and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Apple®, the Apple-Logo®, AppleTalk®, ColorSync®, EtherTalk®, LaserWriter®, Macintosh® and Power Macintosh® are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Finder™, MacroMaker™ and PICT™ are trade marks of Apple Computer, Inc. EPS® is a registered trademark of Altsys Corporation.

Heidelberg®,

Speedmaster®, HeidelSpeedmaster® and Heidelberg ®

berg Quickmaster are registered trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG.

Heidelberg Direct Imaging®is a registered trademark of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG in Germany only. Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, Windows®, Windows 95®, Windows 98®, Windows XP®, Windows NT®, Windows® 2000 and Windows® 2003 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG to distribute for use only in combination with Prinect Signa Station. PANTONE color data and/or software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of Prinect Signa Station. Prinect, Prinect Printready System and Prinect Printready are trademarks of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Other company names, product names and trademarks not expressly mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the corresponding manufacturers and fall within the regulations regarding the protection of trademarks.

PANTONE® colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE color publications exact color. .............................................................................................

EtherShare® is a registered trademark of Helios Software GmbH.

Important notice: We are dedicated to improving and enhancing our products. Consequently, the information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG assumes no responsibility for information and description as far as third-party products are concerned.

The information contained in this manual about performance and speed as well as technical data concerning application of our products is not legally binding as it does not constitute a written contract of features.

If any problems occur with the product described in this manual, please contact the agency which is responsible for you. Order No. SZ.111.0482 Edition February 2006 Printed in Germany.

Table of Contents

ABC Table of Contents Table of Contents

Before You Start ... About this Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXI What you should already know . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXI Further Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXI Symbols and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXII Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXII Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields . . . . . . XXIII Heidelberg online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XXIII 1

2

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

What Is New? General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What's New since Prinect Signa Station 1.5 . . . . . . . . . New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhancements since Version 1.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What's New since Prinect Signa Station 1.0 . . . . . . . . . New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What's New since SignaStation 9.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 1-1 1-1 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-6 1-6

The Heidelberg User Interface Concept of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Four Basic Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspectors Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folder Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drop-down Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1 2-1 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-7 2-8

III

Table of Contents

ABC

Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option/Check Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Button (On/Off Function) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multitool Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Numeric Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Context-sensitive menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents/Full Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forwards/Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Clip Path (Working Mode: Packaging) . . . . . Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

IV

2-8 2-8 2-9 2-9 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-15 2-16 2-17 2-18 2-18 2-20 2-22 2-22 2-22

What's What? Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes) . . . . . . Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet (= Plate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sujet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Bounding Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 4

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Preferences / Getting Started Preferences and Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 View Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Parameters for Automatic File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Defaults for Working Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Default User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Folding Sheet Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Default Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Select External Executables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Default Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Surface Names (Press Sheets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Free Text Replacer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Bleed Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Defaults for folding sheet generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Several Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Proof Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Marks Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Default for Other Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Default Folder for JDFConnector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Resources Default for JDFs with Prep Data . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template) . . 4-16

V

Table of Contents

ABC

JDF Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDS (Master Data Store) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDF Preview Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Atrributes for HTML Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Name or IP of license server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Refresh Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your First Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

6

VI

4-16 4-17 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-22

Job Assistant Basics of Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Product Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with the Job Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order of the Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-4

Browser Window Browser Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Product Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Internal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

7

Resources and Machines General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Creating Custom Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Job Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Product Part Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Papers (Printing Materials) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Page and Paper Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Plate layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Customer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Output Parameter Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 User data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Report Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Creating Custom Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Filmsetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 Platesetters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Sheetfed Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Web Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

8

Graphic Window Graphic Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8-1 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-7 8-9 8-9 8-9

VII

Table of Contents

ABC

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tile Front / Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . Creating Internal Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Sheet/Assembly Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tile Front / Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers . . . . . . . . . Display the Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Text Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an ink pickup bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a cover mark and other internal marks . . . . . . Clip Path Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages per Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . Display and Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Press Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VIII

8-10 8-11 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-16 8-17 8-18 8-20 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-22 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-25 8-25 8-25 8-26 8-26 8-27 8-27 8-27 8-27 8-28 8-28

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . Display and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measured Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8-28 8-29 8-29 8-30 8-30 8-30

Inspectors Window Where You Can Select Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Details in the Inspectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Packaging Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Parameters of the Inspectors in Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 When Do I Use What? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Administrative Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Job and Customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Job Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Job Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Main Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

IX

Table of Contents

ABC

Working Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages in Product Part / Page Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Master Page Types and Trimmed Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page-related Bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Bleed Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Allowance for Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement rule for assigned pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Binding Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creeping and Bottling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks . . . . . . . . Notes on Using Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks colors and collating values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gripper Saddlestitcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation . . . . . . . . Cut Block Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Selected Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Plate Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement rule for perfecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Definition for Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sujet Position on Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the "Imposition" mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Used Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Schemes in the List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Inspector Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X

9-14 9-17 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-21 9-22 9-22 9-22 9-22 9-24 9-24 9-28 9-32 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-36 9-37 9-38 9-38 9-39 9-40 9-41 9-42 9-42 9-42 9-43 9-44 9-45 9-53

Edition February 2006

ABC

Table of Contents

Folding Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Sheet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Block Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1up Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Management Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage" working mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigned Folding Sheets/Assembly Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trimmed Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Active Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9-54 9-54 9-54 9-55 9-56 9-60 9-63 9-65 9-67 9-67 9-67 9-69 9-69 9-69 9-70 9-70 9-70 9-70 9-71 9-71 9-72 9-73 9-73 9-75 9-75 9-75 9-76 9-76 9-76 9-76 9-77 9-77

XI

Table of Contents

ABC

Placement rule for assigned page/1up . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Rule to All Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selected Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply to all pages/1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Area of application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XII

9-77 9-79 9-79 9-79 9-79 9-81 9-81 9-81 9-81 9-82 9-82 9-82 9-82 9-83 9-83 9-83 9-84

10

List Window List Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Press Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Folding Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Not assigned . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

11

Editors General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Plate Template Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Edition February 2006

ABC

Table of Contents

Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate Template Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plate Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imaging Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Resources Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Plate Templates" Resource to the Job . . . . . Folding Scheme Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Scheme Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Center offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheme Generated from Folding Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold Assistant / Folding Sheet Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fold Assistant for Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Used in the Standard Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Gate Fold as a Special Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Schemes" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . Marks Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools for Creating Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Mark Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Text Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11-2 11-4 11-4 11-4 11-6 11-6 11-6 11-8 11-9 11-9 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-13 11-13 11-14 11-16 11-17 11-22 11-22 11-24 11-26 11-27 11-28 11-29 11-29 11-29 11-30 11-30 11-31 11-33 11-33 11-33

XIII

Table of Contents

ABC

Placeholders for Text Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Ink Pickup Bar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Control Bar Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Control Bar Special Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Marks Import Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paper Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Papers (Printing Materials)" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Page and Paper Sizes" Resource to the Job Plate Layout Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Customer Data" Resource to the Job . . . . . Output Parameter Set Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "General" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPP and OPC parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

XIV

11-34 11-39 11-39 11-39 11-40 11-40 11-41 11-41 11-41 11-42 11-43 11-43 11-43 11-44 11-45 11-45 11-46 11-46 11-47 11-47 11-47 11-48 11-48 11-48 11-48 11-48 11-50 11-50 11-51 11-51 11-52 11-52

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

12

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Process calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imaging Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punches Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Punch format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finishing Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output folder for PPF files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saddlestitcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Output Parameter Sets" Resource to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Data Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HTML Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools for the HTML Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" to the Job . . . . . . Sheetfed Press Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading the "Sheetfed Press" to the Job . . . . . . . . . . . . Web Press Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11-52 11-53 11-54 11-55 11-55 11-55 11-57 11-57 11-58 11-58 11-59 11-59 11-59 11-60 11-60 11-62 11-63 11-64 11-64 11-64

Menus in Prinect Signa Station File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Resource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Plate Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Scheme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Paper... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Format... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Plate Layout... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New Customer Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-1 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-3 12-3 12-3 12-3

XV

Table of Contents

ABC

New Output Parameter Set... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 New User Data... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 New Report Header... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Create Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 New Filmsetter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 New Platesetter Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 New Sheetfed Press Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 New Web Press Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Documents ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Resource / Machine ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 Paper or Customer Resource by CSV ... . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5 JDF ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Recent Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Save as ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Export ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 Print Job ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Preferences ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Logoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Jobs & Resources Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Current Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Active Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Resources & Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Plate Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10

XVI

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

13

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Inspectors Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Part Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . Press Sheet Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page/1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Document Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detach/Include Graphic View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Sheet Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Remote Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Prinect Signa Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-10 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-11 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-12 12-13 12-13 12-15 12-15 12-15 12-15 12-15 12-16 12-16

Packaging Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Job Assistant in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . Product Part Inspector in the "Packaging" Mode . . . "Packaging" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting Die File and Main Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information about Loaded CFF2 File ("Info") . . . . . . . . Placement rule for assigned 1ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector . . . . . . . . . . "Attributes" Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1up Inspector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing the Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 13-1 13-1 13-1 13-2 13-2 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-4 13-4 13-4 13-5

XVII

Table of Contents

ABC

Rectangular Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Polygon Clip Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 "StationNumber" Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Step 2: Assigning the station numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 "Station Numbers" Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Background Info about Cover Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Job-internal Cover mark ("InternalMark") . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 "CoverClippath" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19 Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20 Notes on Generating CFF2 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Browser Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24 Overview: Changes in the "Packaging" Mode . . . . . . 13-25 14

XVIII

Sheet Optimization Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Creating a Job with Sheet Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Master Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector: . . . "Sheet Optimization" Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Ribbon Margin" Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic of "Horizontal" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic of "Vertical" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Graphic of "General" Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "Assigned Folding Sheets/Assembly Blocks" Group . . . . .

14-1 14-1 14-2 14-3 14-3 14-5 14-6 14-6 14-7 14-8

Edition February 2006

Table of Contents

ABC

15

16

Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display in the List Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concept for Optimization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions for Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Terms at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14-10 14-10 14-10 14-12 14-12 14-12 14-14 14-16

Drag & Drop What's Behind Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Drag-and-Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . From the Browser Window to the Graphic Window . . . . From the List Window to the Graphic Window . . . . . . . Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . From the Browser Window to the Inspectors Window . . From the Inspectors Window to the Graphic Window . . Files from the Operating System to the Browser Window .

15-1 15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-3 15-4 15-5

Quality Assurance Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Central Call Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 Problem Report for Customers and Service Engineers . . . 16-1 Index

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

XIX

Before You Start ...

ABC Before You Start ...

About this Documentation This documentation applies to Prinect Signa Station version 2.0. This documentation is implemented as the contextsensitive Help in the Prinect Signa Station application and at the same time is a separate reference manual. This means that you immediately have Help online on the screen when you hit the F1 key or, if you wish, you can read up on the information in the reference manual. In this documentation you will learn how... 0

to work with Heidelberg's user interface,

0

to configure Prinect Signa Station optimally,

0

to create your first job with the available resources,

0

each function in Prinect Signa Station works.

What you should already know We assume that you are familiar with the basic functions of Windows ®/Apple® Macintosh®. We assume that you know the basics about reprographics and printing. Further Documentation You will find more information in ...

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

Prinect Signa Station - User's Guide

0

Prinect Signa Station - Installation

XXI

Before You Start ...

ABC

Symbols and Styles The following conventions are used in this manual: 0

References to other chapters and sections are blue (on the screen) and underlined. Example: See the Symbols and Styles, page –XXII.

0

Quotes are used to indicate menus, folders, names of functions, hardware conditions, switch settings, system messages, etc. Example: Set the switch to "off".

0

Menus, functions and submenus are separated from one another by a ">". Example: Select "File > Open..."

0

Buttons which you should hold down simultaneously are connected with a plus character. Example: Press Alt+A.

Important Information Important information in the text is marked by symbols that are used as follows:

3 1 XXII

Warning: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to protect the user from injury. Attention: Contains information that must be taken into consideration to prevent damage to hardware or software.

Edition February 2006

Before You Start ...

ABC

Note: Contains important general or additional infor-

2 mation on a specific topic. Prerequisites: This text contains requirements which be fulfilled before the steps which follow can be 5 must performed. Interference to Monitors by Magnetic Fields Strong magnetic fields may influence your monitor screen (for example, they might make the edges of the screen unsteady or images flicker). This could be caused by the 50 Hz magnetic field coming from the power cables routed along your floors. Recommended measures to eliminate these problems, taking into account the safety regulations for workplaces with monitors in an office environment: 0

Move the monitor to a different location.

0

Shield the source (e.g. shield the cable duct).

0

Lay the power cables differently.

0

Screen the monitor using a metal hood.

Heidelberg online Do you have any questions regarding our products? Do you want to improve your workflow? Then why not pay a visit on the Internet? You can find us at: http://www.heidelberg.com/

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

XXIII

What Is New?

ABC 1 What Is New?

General To keep up with market requirements, Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG has decided to phase out its SignaStation product and concentrate on the newly developed Prinect Signa Station software. The new Prinect Signa Station software has a fully new graphical user interface that is in tune with all other Prinect products, making your work with it consistent and easy. You can find further details about the new user interface in chapter 2, The Heidelberg User Interface. Now we would like to highlight to you briefly what's new or enhanced compared to the "old" SignaStation as well as to Prinect Signa Station, Versions 1.0 and 1.5:

What's New since Prinect Signa Station 1.5 New Functions 0

0

Connection to the Master Data Store system in conjunction with Printready and MetaDimension. See MDS (Master Data Store), page 4–17 for details. New functions for gang run forms in the "Imposition" working mode. See the Gang run form, page 9–39. Some are described briefly below: 0

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

You can turn an open plate template into a gang run form at any time. You can define any (suitable) number of gang run forms. Folding sheets can be arranged automatically by mouse click. You can correct the position,

1–1

What Is New?

ABC

orientation and swap front and back at any time. 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1–2

You can duplicate each folding sheet. It is possible to allow copies of folding sheets to be made automatically (if there is enough space on the press sheet) in a defined scheme. A defined gang run form is marked by the sign "#" in the Product Part Inspector in "List of Selected Plates".

During the import of JDF files, all the files can be checked and, if necessary, changed by the JDF Connector. See Default Folder for JDFConnector, page 4–14 for details. An internal user management was implemented that is similar to the one in Prinect Printready and Prinect MetaDimension. See chapter 15 in the User's Guide for details. New editor for user data. Users can be created and/ or modified in "Resources > User Data". See User Data Editor, page 11–59 for details. A new resource, "Plate Layout" This arranges folding sheets on the press sheet. See Folder Button, page 9–52 and following for details. Integration of a HTML editor. This makes it possible for you to create or change report headers separately and in an easy way. See HTML Editor, page 11–59 for details. Report headers are for HTML output from the list window. See "Save Table as HTML File...", page 10–6 for details. Implementation of a new text mark editor. See Text Mark Editor, page 11–33 for details.

Edition February 2006

What Is New?

ABC

0

0

0

Plate Template Editor You can assign a mark to the "Front" or "Back" or to "All Surfaces" in the "Marks" tab. See Expert Mode:, page 11–7 for details. Folding Scheme Editor and fold animation The "Cut & Stack" function is implemented in the Folding Scheme Editor. You can edit the fold animation (three-dimensional graphic). See Fold Assistant / Folding Sheet Animation, page 11–22 for details. Marks Editor New tool: "Fit canvas to bounding box". See Tools for Creating Marks, page 11–30 for details. Further placeholders were implemented (e.g. Press Name) and it's now possible to define sizes in placeholders. See Placeholders for Text Marks, page 11–34 for details.

Enhancements since Version 1.5 0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Modified performance in the Browser window: For logical reasons, the resources and machines were removed from the Browser window because they cannot be assigned directly to the job. You can now only see the active job with all its parameters in this window. You can find a description of the simpler and clearer handling of the Browser window in Browser Functionality, page 6–1 and in "Resources and Machines", General, page 7–1. Enhanced handling with regard to the positioning of marks. You can position marks directly from the inspectors to the graphic window. See Marks, page 15–3 for details or the User's Guide.

1–3

What Is New?

ABC

0

0

0

0

Simpler handling of several layers (e.g. multilingual documents). More details can be found in Chapter 10 of the User's Guide. Modified menu bar with enhancements and easyto-follow structure. See Menus in Prinect Signa Station, page 12–1 for details. The "Import" tab was added to "File > Preferences". Enhancements were also made in the other tabs. See Preferences, page 4–1 for details. Output Parameter Set Selection of a workflow was made simpler in the Output Parameter Set Editor. You can select the workflow in the list box in "Device". Then only the possible combinations are shown in the list box in "Variant". More details can be found in "Workflow":, page 11–49 in the Output Parameter Set Editor.

What's New since Prinect Signa Station 1.0 New Functions 0

Import of jobs from SignaStation 9.05 You can import "old" jobs from SignaStation to the Prinect Signa Station. More details can be found in the User's Guide.

0

Sheet Optimizer (option) Sheet Optimizer gives you additional functions in the "Montage" working mode. A number of different assembly blocks can automatically be placed optimally on the press sheet with the help of various algorithms. See the section Sheet Optimization, page 14–1.

1–4

Edition February 2006

What Is New?

ABC

0

Packaging printing (option) Packaging printing has been implemented with the functionality found in the SignaStation. See section Packaging, page 13–1 for details.

0

Delta Lists workflow Delta Lists can now be used. The functionality corresponds to that found in the SignaStation. More details can be found in the User's Guide.

0

New Marks Composite mark A composite mark can have several color control marks. During output, the correct mark is automatically used for the press sheet that you want to print. CoverClippath The CoverClippath mark relates to pages/1ups and covers the background, depending on the clip path (mainly for packaging). StationNumber (for Montage and Packaging) The "StationNumber" mark is a text mark that contains a variable (number) and is used to identify a 1up. Barcode The "Barcode" mark is a text mark that facilitates a mechanical production check. For a description of all the marks, see the Chapter "Working with Marks" in the User's Guide. Automatic marks Folding cross, folding sheet cut

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

1–5

What Is New?

ABC

0

New marks tool In the graphic window, two buttons have been added for creating cover marks and ink pickup bars. See section Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool, page 13–20 for details.

0

Gang run forms In the "Imposition" mode, you can create a gang run form within a product part. You can add folding sheets to this gang run form or delete them from there.

0

Bottling Function for large sheets that must be folded several times. Can be used in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes". See section Bottling, page 9–47 for details.

0

0

0

0

The Folding Scheme Editor has been enhanced by a Fold Assistant for web offset. Folding sheet animation (3D) See the Folding Sheet Animation, page 12–13. Collating marks can be placed on all the edges of a page. See Position: Back margin - At foot - Outer At head, page 9–34 for details. Export of resource groups, see "Export Group", page 7–7 for details.

What's New since SignaStation 9.0 New Functions 0

1–6

Structured and easy-to-follow display of the main parameters of a job. This is achieved by the four basic windows (Browser window, graphic window,

Edition February 2006

What Is New?

ABC

inspectors window and list window). See Structure of the User Interface, page 2–1 for details. 0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Simplified setup through drag-and-drop and context-sensitive menus (right mouse button). See also What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1. Creating a new job or changing an existing one is now very simple and easy with the help of the new Job Assistant. See Basics of Job Assistant, page 5–1 for details. Any changes in job-specific parameters can be checked immediately in the graphic window (WYSIWYG). Jobs and product parts can be saved as templates. This makes it much easier to create new jobs. See also "Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"...", page 6–5. The front and back of the press sheet can be shown at the same time in the graphic window (better for checking your work). See Graphic Window, page 8–1. "Undo" and "Redo" were implemented. See Edit Menu, page 12–9 for details. Implementation of tooltips that really say something. See Help!, page 2–13. Context-sensitive Online Help is available (F1 key). See Help!, page 2–13 for details. Automatic functions Automatic placement of folding marks, cut marks and collating marks. See Cut Marks - Folding Marks - Collating Mark - Folding Crosses - Folding Sheet Cuts, page 9–60 for details. With marks and trims, automatic check whether the gaps are correct for imaging. In addition, the

1–7

What Is New?

ABC

size of color control bars can be matched automatically to the sujet. See "Fit Marks and Bleeds", page 8–5 for details. Gaps can be set automatically. See Gaps and Master Pages, page 9–45 for details. 0

0

1–8

Assembly block handling Working with assembly blocks has become simpler. See Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67 for details. Marks handling Working with marks has become simpler. How to work with them is described in the User's Guide.

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC 2 The Heidelberg User Interface

Concept of the User Interface The user interface of Prinect Signa Station was designed to give you the best possible overview of the system at all times. A "flat" hierarchy was therefore selected for the displayed elements, in which – wherever possible – there are no overlapping windows. Things can quickly get muddled, especially when several dialog boxes, perhaps even overlapping each other, are open at the same time. The user interface was therefore designed in such a way that all important settings can be made in the main windows of the application.

Structure of the User Interface The user interface of the Prinect Signa Station consists of "static" and "dynamic" elements. The static elements are always visible while the dynamic elements can change their appearance and contents depending on the operational process that is currently in progress. Prinect Signa Station has four dynamic basic windows that appear when a job is open, showing the data about it. You can resize each of the windows to suit your needs, see Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts, page 2–17.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–1

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

The user interface has the following static elements: 0

the menu bar (1) For details, see Menu Bar, page 2–3.

0

the toolbar (2) For details, see Toolbar, page 2–3.

The user interface has the following dynamic elements:

2–2

0

the Browser window (3) For details, see Browser Functionality, page 6–1.

0

the graphic window (4) For details, see Graphic Window, page 8–1.

0

the inspectors window (5) For details, see Inspectors Window, page 9–1.

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

0

the list window (6) For details, see List Window, page 10–1.

Menu Bar A menu bar with the "File, "Edit", "Jobs & Resources", "Inspectors", "Tools", "Services" and "? (Help)" menus is located at the top of the GUI. The functions listed in these menus are static and can be selected at any time you are processing the job.

You will find a description of the menus in the menu bar in the chapter Menus in Prinect Signa Station, page 12–1. Toolbar The toolbar is a control element where you can trigger important and frequently used functions with a click.

In the toolbar, you can open, create and print jobs and call up various inspectors. You can switch between the resources view and the job view (also using shortcut "Alt + 1"). More details can be found in the "Resources and Machines" chapter, General, page 7–1. You can also select the Default unit, page 4–3 for Prinect Signa Station. If you move the mouse pointer to an icon, a tooltip appears explaining its function.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–3

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

The Four Basic Windows The four basic windows of Prinect Signa Station will now be described. Browser Window The Browser window shows you the open and active job and all of its components in three tabs. A click on the arrows displays more details in a substructure.

See the Browser Functionality, page 6–1. Graphic Window The graphic window shows you the elements of a job you selected as a graphic view.

2–4

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

See the Graphic Functionality, page 8–1. Inspectors Window The inspectors window shows you the settings of the open and selected job. You only see the settings of the inspector that is currently displayed. Depending on which inspector you are in, the caption bar shows the name of the job, product part, working mode and the name of the current inspector.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–5

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

See the Where You Can Select Inspectors, page 9–1. List Window The list window shows you the elements of a selected job as a table.

See the List Functionality, page 10–1.

2–6

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Button Click a button to trigger an action. A window displays or a function is performed directly.

Folder Button The folder button opens the file selection dialog, see the File Selection Dialog, page 2–11.

Drop-down Menu You can display different drop-down menus in the menu bar. See Menus in Prinect Signa Station, page 12–1 for details.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–7

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

List Box An arrow on a button indicates that the button contains more than one option and that these options are mutually exclusive: it is only possible to select one at a time.

Tabs The screen contents vary depending on the tab you click.

Details The right arrow means that another section with details (e.g. folder structure) can be opened up. Vice versa, the down arrow means that this section with details can be collapsed again.

2–8

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Option/Check Box You can select just one of the options shown, for example, "Imposition", "Autom. Imposition" or "Montage". This indicates that a setting is selected. You can deselect this setting by clicking the check box again.

Tool Button (On/Off Function) Each tool button has a function that you can enable or disable. The button is shown in reverse video when the function is enabled.

Multitool Button There is an "arrow" at the bottom right of the button that lists the available modes or tools when you rightclick it on the PC or use the command key + mouse button on the Macintosh. Select the mode or tool you want. It moves to the top of the list where its function can then be triggered.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–9

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Text Boxes Places where you can enter data yourself are highlighted by a dark background.

Numeric Text Boxes

2–10

0

Boxes for linear dimensions: You can decide whether the data displayed will be with or without a unit of measure in "File > Preferences > General > Show Units".

0

Boxes for linear dimensions: The linear dimension is converted to the default unit of measure if you enter a value in a unit that doesn't correspond to the default one.

0

Calculations are possible in a numeric text box (addition, subtraction, multiplication and division).

0

Errors: Some boxes have limits. The limit displays if it is exceeded. The box turns red and a beep sounds.

0

Accuracy: You can enter numeric values as accurately as you want. The system uses precisely this accuracy internally. In the user interface, however, the values that are displayed are only accurate to approx. 1/100 mm.

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

File Selection Dialog The file selection dialog appears at various points in Prinect Signa Station. Two variations of the dialog are possible. 1. The following dialog displays if you wish to open a job:

You can then select and open a job. You can use the buttons to look in folders, create a new folder or change to a different folder level. Click the arrow on the right to define your favorite folders. 2. The following dialog displays if you want to load a template (e.g. a plate template) to a job:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–11

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

You can then select files in existing structures and folders. The top folder level displays automatically. This varies according to where you are in the application when you clicked the folder button. Context-sensitive menu The functions of a context-sensitive menu vary, depending on where you are in the application (for that reason, context). If you use a mouse with two buttons, click the other mouse button to display the context-sensitive menu. (The right button if you are right-handed, and the left if you are left-handed provided that you reconfigured your mouse buttons.)

2–12

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

With the Macintosh single-button mouse, you display the context-sensitive menu by holding down the Ctrl key at the same time you click with the button. Below is an example of the context-sensitive menu as it displays in the graphic window in the "Press Sheet" tab:

Help! If you let the pointer hover over a button for a moment, a tooltip appears explaining what the button is for. Other useful tooltips appear at many different points in the application as well (e.g. text boxes).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–13

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

You can disable the tooltip display in "File > Preferences > General". If you need more information, press F1 on your keyboard to display the Online Help. The Online Help is context-sensitive. This means that you first see information that relates immediately to the context you are presently in.

2–14

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Hyperlinks

Hyperlinks are blue text that you can use to jump to somewhere else in the documentation. Contents/Full Text Search In the left-hand side of the Help Window, you navigate to a topic from the contents or you can search for all occurrences of a certain term (full text search by selecting the magnifying glass).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–15

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Forwards/Backwards Using the arrows in the header and footer of every page, you can move from one page to the next. In this way, you can browse through the Online Help from start to finish just like a book.

The up arrow returns you to the page you started on in Online Help.

Use the arrows in the toolbar of the Online Help to go to the previous page and, if you want, back to where you were.

2–16

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts You can also call up some functions using keyboard shortcuts. You can also call up many functions using mouse and keyboard shortcuts. Some shortcuts vary, depending on the computer platform you use. The following table lists some shortcuts: Key / Button (PC)

Key / Button (Mac)

Command key

Ctrl

*/#

Alt key

Alt

alt / ⌥

E

E

Alternative mouse button

Ctrl + mouse button

Enter key Context-sensitive menu Shift key Tab key

×

× T

You can move sliders with the arrow keys, horizontal sliders with the left and right arrows, and vertical sliders with the up and down arrows. Use the Tab key to jump to the next element. Hit the spacebar to trigger the function of the selected element (e.g. button).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–17

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

General Functions Keyboard Function Command key + A Select all files/pages in lists. Command key + click Add/deselect single files/pages in lists. Shift key click + click Select blocks of files/pages in lists. Double click on the The window is maximized at the sides. caption bar of a window Double-click the caption bar again to return to the standard size. Click on small arrows The window is maximized in length (up arrow) or in on borders between the width (right arrow). four basic windows Click the down/left arrows to return to the standard size. Click on window The window is made bigger or smaller manually. border, move holding down mouse button

Menu functions File Menu Keyboard Function Command key + O Open Job Command key + S Save job (selected job) Command key + N Start Job Assistant Command key + P Output (displays the "Print Job" window) Command key + W Close job (selected job)

2–18

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Command key + Q Exit program Edit Menu Keyboard Function Command key + Z Undo function (not possible with all functions) Command key + Y Redo function (redoes undone function).

Jobs & Resources Menu Keyboard Function Alt + 1 Display the current job Alt + 0 Go back to the previously selected resources. Command key + Shift You can switch between the jobs open in the Browser key + 0, 1, 2, etc. window using digits 1, 2, 3 (job is then active). Alt + 2 Display general resources and machines Alt + 3 Display plate templates Alt + 4 Display schemes Alt + 5 Display marks

Inspectors Menu Keyboard Function Command key + 1 Display the Job Inspector Command key + 2 Display the Product Part Inspector Command key + 3 Display the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–19

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Command key + 4 Display the Press Sheet Inspector Command key + 5 Display the Page/1up Inspector Command key + 6 Display the Document Inspector Tools Menu Keyboard Function F3 The graphic window is detached from the user interface so that you can scale it up. Hit F3 again to integrate the window back into the user interface.

Graphic Window Keyboard / Mouse Function Double click on the The window in the graphic view is maximized in caption bar of a window length (applies to all four basic windows). Double-click the caption bar again to return to the standard view. Double click on the Shows or hides the back. colored caption bar of the front/back sheet F11 and F12 key In the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and " Page List" tabs, you can select the next content with F11 and the previous one with F12.

2–20

Edition February 2006

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Command key + Zoom in space bar + click Command key + Alt + Zoom out space bar + click Space bar Move tool (hand) Click on ruler, drag to Set magnetic snap lines position holding down mouse button Alt + click on selected Delete snap line snap line Command key + Shift Set a measuring position key + click Command key + Shift Create the measurement tool key + click hold down mouse button and draw rectangle Click on ruler cross, Set zero on the ruler define position with mouse pointer and click Double click on ruler cross Reset zero to standard origin Command key + 9 Shows the back. Command key + 9 again to return to the standard view. Command key + 0 Open the "View Properties" dialog

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

2–21

The Heidelberg User Interface

ABC

Page Inspector Keyboard Function Click in "Offset" box + Set position for alignment of offset command key + Shift key + click in the "Folding Sheet" graphic view Click in text boxes + left/ Change "Offset" and "Scaling" step-by-step and visibly right arrow keys with the arrow keys

Editing the Clip Path (Working Mode: Packaging) Keyboard Function See Editing the Clip Path, page 13–5 for details.

Help Menu Keyboard Function F1 Online Help

2–22

Edition February 2006

What's What?

ABC 3 What's What?

Terms Used in Prinect Signa Station In this chapter, we will explain essential terms in Prinect Signa Station that are absolutely necessary for you to fully understand what is being described. We believe it is very important that you know the meaning of these terms and what they entail. Job A job is saved to your disk as a file with the extension ".sdf" and the name you give it. You can specify the path to the file location in "Preferences". The job file contains all the data and settings that were made at Prinect Signa Station. The job can consist of several product parts where different working modes (imposition, montage) are defined. The name of the open job appears in the caption bars of the four basic windows (Browser window, graphic window, inspectors window and list window). Product Part Is one part of the job. You can save the "Imposition", "Autom. Imposition"; "Packaging" and "Montage" working modes as a product part. The product part in turn can also consist of several parts such as the press sheets, folding sheets and/or data pages if they were filed in a page list.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

3–1

What's What?

ABC

Internal marks are marks that are in a job. A mark can be present in several product parts and, for that reason, marks are job components as well. They are on the same hierarchy level as the product parts.

Master Page The master page specifies the trimmed size of the pages on the press sheet. In addition, you can also define details about the type (left page), extra space and placement of the assigned pages. By assigning master pages in a folding sheet (the folding sheet is part of a press sheet), you define the dimension of the folding sheet. Folding Schemes (Schemes, Imposition Schemes) A folding scheme describes how the sheets will be folded in finishing. A folding scheme doesn't have any dimensional data. It only tells you that there are a certain number of pages on a folding sheet and defines how they must be folded. Heidelberg has its own "Heidelberg Fold Type Catalog". This has more than 80 folding schemes that Heidelberg's folders can process.

3–2

Edition February 2006

What's What?

ABC

The fold type catalog is integrated into Prinect Signa Station. You can also create your own custom scheme with the "Folding Scheme Editor". More details can be found in Folding Scheme Editor, page 11–9.

Folding Sheet A folding sheet is defined when you give a folding scheme dimensional data. In Prinect Signa Station, this is done by assigning master pages or page sizes and gaps between the pages (head, foot and page trims). A folding sheet is the "central unit" in finishing. The folded sheets can be placed in the stacker of a saddlestitcher. The saddlestitcher then gathers the sheets from the stackers and binds them with staples (saddlestitching). A folding sheet contains a folding scheme, assigned pages and marks (cut, folding and collating). blue = collating mark red = folding marks green = cut marks

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

3–3

What's What?

ABC

Plate templates A plate template describes the parameters that must be considered during output. They can be press parameters such as plate size, maximum paper size, gripper margin, lead edge of print. The plate template makes sure that imaging is in the exposable area of the CtP and in the printable area of the press. The plate template is equivalent to the press sheet without the folding sheet, i.e. also without the folding scheme and marks applied subsequently. Press Sheet (= Plate) In Prinect Signa Station, the term 'press sheet' is the same as 'plate' (Press Sheet tab, Press Sheet Inspector). The press sheet is the same as the plate template with

3–4

Edition February 2006

What's What?

ABC

placed folding sheets and data pages. You can set the colors for displaying the single elements in the graphic view in the preferences, "General > Color Setting". Here is an example: yellow = folding sheets/assembly blocks cyan = paper light purple = plate blue-and-white line (dark purple area) = max. imaging area (depends on imagesetter you use) reddish-brown strip = critical area (gripper margin)

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

3–5

What's What?

ABC

Paper (Printing Materials) Paper (printing materials) is the press sheet that is printed by the plate. The folding scheme or folding sheet must fit on the paper. Sujet Sujet is the term for the bounding box around the printed area on the press sheet. Assembly Block An assembly block is very similar to a folding sheet. It is a type of scheme with the required number of 1ups and their distribution. All the 1ups of an assembly block have the same trimmed size (analog to the master page in the folding sheet). You can also define the gaps between the 1ups. Unlike the folding sheet, an assembly block is not folded but finished in a cutter. Tiles Tiles can be folding sheets or assembly blocks. These can both occur together in one job. Marks There are several types of marks such as register, cut, folding, collating, page and custom marks as well as color control bars. In Prinect Signa Station, cut, folding and collating marks can be set automatically, all other marks on the other hand must be added manually. The marks on a plate template are used automatically when press sheets are created. You can also import marks and create your own ones.

3–6

Edition February 2006

What's What?

ABC

Bounding Boxes When assigning PDF data pages, it is important to know which bounding boxes are in the PDF file and how Prinect Signa Station evaluates them (see also the section Placement rule for assigned pages, page 9–22). The following three boxes in a PDF document can be evaluated by Prinect Signa Station: 0

Media box: The media box contains all the objects of a page. This includes all texts, images and marks that appear on the page or extend beyond the page edge. The media box is the biggest box.

0

Crop box: If a crop box is defined in the PDF document, the page is cropped to the size of the crop box. This is the size that the page displays in Acrobat and is printed. The crop box defines the way the page contents are positioned on the output medium if no other information is available (e.g. imposition instructions via JDF). The crop box is smaller than the media box.

0

Trim box: The trim box specifies the final page size after printing and cutting. The Acrobat trim box is equivalent to the term "trimmed size" used in Prinect Signa Station. If a PDF document has a trim box, the trim box should be identical to the trimmed size of the page. The trim box is smaller than the crop and media box.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

3–7

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC 4 Preferences / Getting Started

Preferences and Getting Started This chapter will help you to configure Prinect Signa Station as you need it and to create your first job in the "Autom. Imposition" mode. To create jobs, you need resources that you can create later for your own device setup. For your first job, however, we will use the default resources. See , page 7–1 for details about creating your own resources.

Preferences In the Preferences, you can set parameters that simplify working with Prinect Signa Station. You can save, cancel or reset your settings at any time in the dialog: 0

Cancel Click this button to discard any changes you made in all of the tabs and close the window.

0

Reset Click this button to reset your settings in all of the tabs back to the last version saved.

0

Save Click this button to save all the changes you made in all of the tabs.

General In this tab, you configure the way Prinect Signa Station will display on your screen. In addition, a preview of PDF files can be displayed automatically when they are being loaded.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–1

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

View Attributes Tooltips A tooltip appears or is always hidden. If you let the pointer hover over an element, e.g. a button, for a moment, a tooltip appears explaining what this element is for. Units in text boxes The selected unit is shown in boxes where dimensions are specified. Unit in toolbar The "Unit" list box is shown by default in the toolbar. The list box no longer appears when you deselect the check box. List Window It is possible to hide the list window permanently. As a result, the graphic window is bigger height wise. If the list window is hidden, you can show it again only by enabling it in these preferences. Show all messages again This option lets you show or hide the message windows. Cutting die color In the "Packaging" mode, the "Cutting Die" column displays in the Job Inspector in "Colors > Color Definitions". You can enable the color of the cutting die in this tab.

4–2

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

A cutting die color indicates the color that is used to outline a cutting die in a PDF document. Cutting die colors can be handled separately in the JDF workflow. For example, the output of a plate can be suppressed automatically for the cutting die color. See Colors, page 9–9 for details. Default unit The unit selected in the list box is used as the default unit of measure for your work with the Prinect Signa Station application. Existing values are immediately converted to the new unit if you change the unit of measure in the list box (e.g. from centimeter to inch). The following units of measure with their equivalents in millimeters are available: Unit of measure

Conversion to millimeters

1 millimeter

1 mm

1 inch

25.4 mm

1 centimeter

10 mm

1 meter

1,000 mm

1 point

0.353 mm

1 Pica

4.21 mm

1 Cicero

4.51 mm

1 Didot

0.376 mm

Note: Numbers that have more than three zeros after

2 "0." are shown as exponential numbers. Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–3

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

An example is given below: The value 0.06 millimeter would be shown as 0.000006 meter if you switched the unit of measure to meters. However, since the boxes cannot show an infinite number of digits, the value in our example is shown as an exponential number, 6E-5 meter Explanation: The first digit '6' describes the real value, the second digit '5' after the 'E' the number of zeros after the decimal point. Display color This is where you configure the background color for the Graphic Functionality, page 8–1. You can give the various areas different colors to be able to clearly tell them apart, e.g. the plate and paper you use. "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block", "Paper", "Plate" and the "critical printed area" can be highlighted by different colors. The default setting already highlights these areas accordingly. 1. In the list box in "Display color", select the area whose color you wish to change. 2. Then click the button beside the list box and change the colors, using the sliders, to the setting you want in the "RGB" color space. 3. Confirm the "Color Selection" dialog with "OK". 4. Then save your setting with "Save" in the "Preferences" dialog. Language By default, Prinect Signa Station appears in the language that is set for the computer's operating system.

4–4

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

However, you can also set the dialog language of Prinect Signa Station, irrespective of the operating system. Select one of the languages offered in the "Language" list box and save your change. The language change will take effect the next time that Prinect Signa Station starts. Parameters for Automatic File Names You can select/deselect the components you would like a file name to have by default when it is saved. More details can be found in Full job name, page 9–7 in the Job Inspector. Defaults for Working Mode Sheet optimizer (previously label optimization) The option is only enabled if you acquired a license for it. When the Job Assistant starts, "Montage" and "Sheet Optimizer" are enabled by default. Customers that work frequently with labeling should enable this check box. See Sheet Optimization, page 14–1 for details on working with this option. Default User Default user on The default user set in this box is automatically logged on when Prinect Signa Station starts. You will find a description of the implemented user management in the User's Guide.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–5

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Folding Sheet Animation Use OpenGL hardware support in folding sheet animation You need a graphics card with implemented OpenGL for the folding sheet animation to run perfectly (even in the Fold Assistant). Without the graphics card, the editing function is not enabled in the Fold Assistant. Paths The preferences defined in "Paths" save you unnecessary steps when you are saving and opening files. In addition, you can define a path to Acrobat Distiller and Acrobat Reader to start them automatically whenever they are needed. Default Folder The path and folder set in "Workspace" defines where the resources folders are also filed. If you change the default "Workspace", the resources included in the shipment in the "Standard" folder are copied to this new workspace. Any user-specific resources remain in the old path structure and can no longer be seen or selected in Prinect Signa Station. This applies to the following resources folders and paths:

4–6

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Set the other folder paths to suit your needs. Click the folder button and select the folder you want. By default, data are opened and saved from the set folder path. Example: The folder that you set in the "Paths" tab in "Jobs" appears by default when you select "File > Open". Select External Executables Acrobat Distiller must be installed to be able to open PostScript files (*.ps). Acrobat Distiller automatically converts PostScript files to the PDF format. In Prinect Signa Station, settings are defined for the Distiller that are used automatically for the conversion to PDF. You can also define the path to Acrobat Reader for viewing PDF files. Note: Using the folder button, define the paths to

Distiller and Acrobat Reader. Select the 2 Acrobat respective ".exe" files.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–7

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Names You can assign names to layers in the "Names" tab that can then be used as default layer names when you enter several layers in the Job Inspector (you can change these names at any time in the Job Inspector). You can find more details about working with several layers in the User's Guide or in View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12. In addition, it's also possible to modify and/or define default names and attributes. Default Layer Names In the "Name" column, double-click the row with the index you want to change and type the new name of that layer. Example of a bilingual document with language-independent images: Index

Name

1

Images

2

German

3

English

The procedure for showing layers is described in View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 in the Graphic Window chapter. You will find a sample job in the User's Guide.

4–8

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Surface Names (Press Sheets) In Sheetfed Press You can overwrite each of the default terms "Front" and "Back". The terms are used in the graphic window and for output. In Web Press You can overwrite each of the default terms "Top" and "Bottom". The terms are used in the graphic window and for output. Free Text Replacer Names You can define general, job-specific replacers (features) that can then be filled with data in the "Attributes" tab in the Job Inspector. You can define up to 15 replacers. You should define the replacers before you open a job. When you open a job, the replacers are then defined in the Job Inspector. See Attributes, page 9–12 for more details. Defaults This tab shows you typical defaults for the functions usually used. The defaults are only meant to simplify your work and can be changed at any time later in the job. You can also set options for special functions that simplify or automate a certain procedure.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–9

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Bleed Default Bleed The default for the bleed is 3 mm. You can find more details about bleeds in Master Pages, page 9–18. in routing margin Prerequisite: Perfect binding is chosen as the binding method. You can change the bleed in the routing margin. This enables you to handle the special requirements of different gluing techniques. Negative values produce a "colorless" area at the routing edge of a page. Defaults for folding sheet generation Minimum and maximum routing margin The routing margin defines the space that is required only in perfect binding to get a "smooth" gluing edge. The default for the "minimum routing margin" is 2 mm and for the "maximum routing margin" 3 mm. You can find more details about the routing margin in Use routing margin, page 9–36. Maximum head gap / Maximum gap width The defaults for maximum head gap and maximum gap width define the largest possible spacing of the gaps on a folding sheet. These defaults are applied when you use the "Automatic Gaps" function in the Product Part Inspector in the "Schemes" tab.

4–10

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Several Switches Center sujet The sujet is centered in all directions relative to the paper when you select "Sheetwise" as well. The lower edge of the sujet with the bleed size is positioned on the lead edge (blue line) when this option is not selected. Scheme filter Only schemes that fit on the paper and where the number of pages is less than or equal to the number of unplaced pages are displayed for selection. You can disable the filter later when selecting a scheme, for example, with the Product Part Inspector. Cut Marks on All Corners For the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes. Cut marks are also set on the "inner" page edges if there is enough space on a folding sheet. Fixed Cut Marks in Creeping The cut marks are not moved in creeping. This affects the ProofColor layer, gives you a better check of the proof. The option must be enabled before you open a job. Sujet Clipped Marks Centered on Plate Color control marks with "AutoClip to sujet" are automatically centered on the plate.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–11

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

One Folding Sheet per Sheet The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option is the preference for the same option in the "Product Part Inspector > Schemes > Active Inspector Section > Press Sheet Layout". See One Folding Sheet per Sheet, page 9–51 for details. Constant Press Sheet Order You can change the folding sheet order for better pagination in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes > Active Inspector Section "All Folding Sheets". This change also changes the press sheet order. Enable this option if you wish to keep the press sheet order unchanged. Restrict "Apply" functions in Page Inspector In some cases, it may not make sense to apply placement rules and marks to all the pages in the job. You can use this box to restrict the function to the pages of the currently active folding sheet/assembly block. Proof Color You can set the line width manually for a proof output. The default line width is 0.035 mm. Lines to folding sheet edges Lines are drawn to the edges of the folding sheet on the ProofColor layer so that you can judge the proof better.

4–12

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Arrow Keys Defines the distance you move objects in the graphic window each time you click an arrow key, e.g. when moving assembly blocks. Default: 1 mm per step (click on arrow key) Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used only when you output to third-party RIPs. More details can be found in Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs, page 9–11 in the Job Inspector. Resources You can define defaults in the "Resources" tab that Prinect Signa Station will then automatically use. Marks Default For your folding sheets, you can select defaults for "Cut Marks", "Folding Marks", "Collating Marks", "Collating Mark Extension", "Folding Crosses", "Folding Sheet Cut", "Fold Lay Marks" and "Folding Sheet Labels". These marks are then automatically set if the relevant boxes were checked in the Product Part Inspector, for example. Click the folder button beside the mark type and select the mark you want. A change in mark type is immediately applied in the current job if you first deselect and then check the relevant box (e.g. "Cut Marks") in the "Marks" tab in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector". The new default mark displays at once in the graphic window.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–13

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Barcode Font You can use barcode fonts in the Marks Editor. You will find a description in the chapter "Working with Marks" in the User's Guide. Default for Other Resources Reader's Spread Template You can use the "11x17-TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A3TwoUp (ReadersSpread)", "A4-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" and "Letter-OneUp (ReadersSpread)" product part templates for converting your data to reader's spread. These templates cause the defined master pages of the product part to be converted to reader's spread when you select "Product part in reader's spread". For more details, see "Product part in reader's spread", page 6–6. Report Header When you print tables from the list window (see "Save Table as HTML File...", page 10–4), you can give the tables a header that is defined by the "Report Header.html" file (includes variables such as job name, customer name, page total,...). You can define a custom header with the HTML Editor. See HTML Editor, page 11–59 for details. After you defined the header, you can then select it in this tab. Import Default Folder for JDFConnector The JDF Connector checks the specification of the JDF files that will be imported and adapts some of the parameters for Prinect Signa Station. An error log file

4–14

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

and the JDF file are moved to an error folder if the specification in the JDF file is incorrect for Prinect Signa Station. The JDF Connector does not correct any errors in the JDF file. The JDF Connector is a separate program that can also be installed during installation. It runs automatically from a defined hot folder if "AutoStart JDF Connector" is checked and checks any incoming JDF files. The input folder is defined by default as the hot folder: "C:...\All Users\Application Data\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_2\JDFConnectorIn" All JDF files saved or copied to the input folder are checked automatically by the JDF Connector and are moved to the error folder or output folder, depending on the result. Default output folder: "C: ...\All Users\Application Data\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_2\JDFConnectorOut" You can then load the JDF file from the output folder to Prinect Signa Station with "File > Open" or "File > Import > JDF...". The following folder hierarchy is set by default:

Resources Default for JDFs with Prep Data The output parameter set defined in this box is used automatically if the "Full Layout" function was used in Printready. When this function is set, the layout is

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–15

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

generated automatically after the JDFs are imported from Printready and is sent back to Printready without any manual intervention. Default Groups for Imports (JDF / Signa 9 Template) Plate templates This is where you define the folder where Prinect Signa Station looks for a suitable plate template during a JDF or Signa 9 Template import. The search criterion is the sheet size named in the JDF. Click the folder button on the right and select the folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by default. Scheme This is where you define the folder where Prinect Signa Station looks for a suitable scheme during a JDF or Signa 9 Template import. Click the folder button on the right and select the folder you want. The "Standard" folder is set by default. JDF Attributes Automatic Gaps with JDF Import JDFs that are imported with internal "stripping params" (from job preparation) are used automatically to calculate the gaps.

4–16

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

MDS (Master Data Store) Use MDS Connection to an MDS is possible if you are working with Printready and/or MetaDimension and an MDS is installed. Type the name of the server on which the MDS is installed. Working with an MDS lets you access central resources in the network from your workstations. You can export only local resources of "Papers (Printing Materials)" of a workstation to the MDS. See "To MDS...", page 7–8 for details. The "Papers (Printing Materials)", "Customer Data", "User Data" and "Platesetters" resources are available through the MDS but can only be viewed in the respective editor. It is not possible to edit the MDS resources with Prinect Signa Station. Local resources for the "Platesetters" and "User Data" resources are available in addition to the MDS resources. Resources from the MDS are marked by a disk icon.

Processes Preview Attributes Automatic Preview Previews are automatically calculated when pages are assigned in a job. These are shown in the graphic window.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–17

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Hires Preview Imported pages are shown with a resolution of 72 dpi in the preview in the graphic window. You can increase the preview resolution to 144 dpi if you select "Hires Preview". Note: Remember that it takes some time to compute

If necessary, you can always generate pre2 previews. views later in the Browser or graphic window. PDF Preview Attributes One Page per Color in Separated PDF When this option is selected, each color separation (CMYK and any spot colors) becomes a single document page. Color separations are not combined to form logical pages. Use Thumbnails for Preview

Prinect Signa Station doesn't calculate the preview itself but uses the thumbnails of the PDF file that you will import. The advantage of this is a fast view but the quality of the preview may not be the best. Atrributes for HTML Reports Sheet Previews You will find the "Save Table as HTML File" function in the context-sensitive menu in the list window. The HTML file contains information about the job and image files (*.png) with the plates available in the job if you selected "Sheet Previews".

4–18

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

Automatic Reprots for JDF Output When JDFs are output, a "report" folder is created in the output path. The HTML report of the job is filed in this folder. Option Chooser The window below displays when you first start Prinect Signa Station. To add to or change your licenses and options at a later period, you can make your changes in the "Option Chooser" tab. The changes are enabled when the system restarts.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–19

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

License Server This option is set by default and lets you install a full version of Prinect Signa Station. You must have a valid license for this. Demo Mode The entire software functionality is available to you in the demo mode. You can put the software through all its paces and only then decide if you want to acquire a license. It is not possible to output a job. When you save demo jobs, they will be marked so that you cannot output any of the jobs you created.

1

Attention: You can open jobs from the full version of Prinect Signa Station and change them but you cannot output them again once they are saved in the demo mode. You should not open your production jobs with the demo version.

Name or IP of license server A Heidelberg license server must be installed on your computer or in the network to be able to run Prinect Signa Station. Type the name or IP address of this license server into the box. Refresh Connection Shows connection status to the License Server. You can refresh the display if necessary. Basic Packages Select the basic package you have a license for. The following packages are available:

4–20

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

0

“Prinect Signa Station 52”: Printing plate width is restricted to 67.5 cm. All output formats are available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format (JT)).

0

“Prinect Signa Station 74”: Printing plate width is restricted to 83.5 cm. All output formats are available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format (JT)).

0

“Prinect Signa Station 102”: Printing plate width is restricted to 405 cm. All output formats are available to you (PDF, JDF, PostScript, Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format (JT)).

0

“Prinect Signa Station JDF/JT”: Printing plate width is restricted to 405 cm. Only the JDF and JT (Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format) output formats are available to you.

Options Select the option matching your license. Multiple selection is possible. The following options are given:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

“Presetting”: With this option released, data for further processing (CIP4-JDF) are automatically generated. In addition to the automatically generated CIP4-JDF data you can manually generate PPF files (see also User's Guide, chapter “Generation of CIP3-PPF/CIP4-JDF Data”).

0

"Packaging": Only when this option is enabled can you work in the "Packaging" mode (see the section Packaging, page 13–1).

0

"Sheet Optimizer": When this option is enabled, you can use all the functions for sheet optimization in the "Montage" mode (see the section Sheet Optimization, page 14–1).

4–21

Your First Job When you are happy with the preferences you defined, you can start on your job. We can skip creating resources for the moment as ready resources are shipped with Prinect Signa Station. Read up on how to create your own resources in the User's Guide or in , page 7–1. Job Specifications 0

You will create your first job, a Heidelberg manual, in the "Autom. Imposition" mode.

0

The book will be approx. 70 pages long, will have perfect binding and be printed in A5 format. The book describes the "SuperColor" application.

0

A Prosetter imagesetter will be used for output and an SM102 as the press.

0

You will create the job with the help of the Job Assistant integrated in Prinect Signa Station.

Procedure 1. Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or use the shortcut "command key + N". 2. The Job Assistant window displays:

The Job Assistant defines the logical order in which you can set all the data you need for your job. 3. You define general data for your job in the "Job Data" window. Enter the following data for your first job:

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

(4.) Job Number = 0001 (5.) Job Name = Heidelberg manual (6.) Click "Customer Name" in "From Template". (7.) Select "Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG" from the "Standard" folder and confirm with "OK". (8.) The customer name and the customer number are used automatically. Other inputs in the "Job Data" window are not necessary. 9. Go to the next window "Product Part Definition" by clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the window.

10. In the "Product Part Definition" window, you give the product part a name and select the working mode you want: (11.) Enter "Supercolor" as the product part name in "Main Features > Name". (12.) Select "Autom. Imposition" as your working mode. Other inputs in the "Product Part Definition" window are not necessary. 13. Go to the next window "Master Pages" by clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the window. 14. You define the trimmed size in the "Master Pages" window: (15.) Click the folder button after "Width" and "Height". (16.) Select the "A5" page format from the "Standard" folder. The A5 values are automatically applied.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–23

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

(17.) As we don't need any trim for our documentation, set "Page-related trim" to "0". Other inputs in the "Master Pages" window are not necessary. 18. Go to the next window "Binding Methods" by clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the window. 19. You must enter the following data in the "Binding Methods" window: (20.) Select "Perfect Binding in "Binding Methods". (21.) Select the check boxes for "Cut Marks", "Folding Marks" and "Collating Marks" in "Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks". (22.) You can leave all other settings in the window as they are. 23. Go to the next window "Printing Plates" by clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the window. 24. You select the plate template and paper definition you want in the "Printing Plates" window: (25.) Click the folder button after "List of Selected Plates". (26.) Select the "SM102" plate template from the "Standard" folder. The values of the plate template are displayed in the window and automatically applied after you confirm with "OK". (27.) Select "Sheetwise" in the "Placement rule for perfecting" list box. (28.) Click the folder button after "Paper Definition for Production".

4–24

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

(29.) Select the "Profisilk_90_100x70" paper from the "Standard" folder. The values of the paper are displayed in the window and automatically applied after you confirm with "OK". 30. Go to the next window "Folding Schemes" by clicking the "right arrow" button in the lower part of the window. 31. In the "Folding Schemes" window, you define the folding scheme and set the head, foot and back margins (if necessary, automatic setting): (32.) Click the folder button after "Scheme Name". Note: When you select a scheme, only those schemes

can be arranged best on the sheet using the set2 that tings you defined so far (selected trimmed size, plate template and paper size) will be displayed. You can disable this filter function, if necessary, in the lower part of the window. (33.) Select the "F32-05_li_4x4" scheme from the "Standard" folder. The scheme displays in the graphic window on the right and is automatically applied after you confirm with "OK". (34.) Click "Automatic Gaps" to apply the gaps from the preferences. The scheme changes accordingly in the graphic window and displays as follows:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–25

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

35. Now quit the Job Assistant by clicking the "end" right arrow button in the lower part of the window. This concludes your job setup in the Job Assistant. 36. You have now created your job, but it is not yet saved. Select "File > Save". The job is now saved on your disk and you can start to import the PDF files. 37. Go to the "Contents" tab in the Browser window. Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "PDF Documents" to display the context-sensitive menu and select "Documents...". 38. The window that opens displays automatically in the "pdfdocuments" folder. Select "Supercolor.pdf". The PDF file displays in the Browser window.

4–26

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

39. Right-click (PC, Mac: ctrl key and click) "Supercolor" to display the context-sensitive menu and select "Add Pages". The pages are positioned automatically in the scheme in the graphic window. 40. When all the pages are imported, save your job again. Select "File > Save". 41. Now check whether all the pages were positioned correctly and all the press sheets required created. Double-click the "yellow" caption bar in the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window. You now see front and back and they should be something like this:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–27

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

42. Change to the "Press Sheet List" tab. The press sheet list shows you all the press sheets that were created and that you need:

4–28

Edition February 2006

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

43. Three press sheets with front and back were created in our job. 44. After a check, you can now print your job. Go to "File > Print Job". 45. Click the folder button after "Output Parameter Set" and select "Prosetter (PDF)" from the "Standard" folder.The press sheets you wish to print are already selected.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

4–29

Preferences / Getting Started

ABC

46. Click the "Options" button after "Output Parameter Set", then click the folder button after "Output folder for PDF, JDF, JT" in the "General" tab and select the suggested folder "Output" if it is not yet entered. 47. Close the window with "Save". 48. Now click the "Output" button. 49. You will be notified if your output was successful. Close the window by clicking "OK". 50. At the PC, the file is saved to the following folder: "C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_2\Output". 51. At the Macintosh, the file is saved to the following folder: "C:\Startup Disk\Users\All Users\Heidelberg\PrinectSignaStation_2\Output". 52. The PDF file with all its parameters is printed to the folder listed above.

4–30

Edition February 2006

Job Assistant

ABC 5 Job Assistant

Basics of Job Assistant The Job Assistant guides you step-by-step through your data input in the various inspectors and makes it easy for you to create and change jobs and product parts. The Job Assistant has the same data input structure as the inspectors. It's easy for you because you don't have to know which parameters must be entered or changed in which inspector and the order in which you must do this. The Job Assistant presents you with all the relevant parameters in their turn. You always create a new job with the Job Assistant. To change a job, you don't necessarily need the Job Assistant. You can make changes directly in the inspectors window if you want to change just one or two parameters in the job or product part or if you are already very familiar with the inspectors. For more details, see Inspectors Window, page 9–1. The "From Template" folder buttons allow you to use existing resources at any time, for example, jobs, customer data, product parts, page sizes, plate templates and folding schemes. Refer also to , page 7–1.

Starting the Job Assistant You can start the Job Assistant when you mark your job or product part in the "Product Parts" tab in the Browser window, then display the context-sensitive menu and create a new job or product part or edit existing ones. You can also display the Job Assistant with the "File > New" menu. The contents of the Job Inspector vary, depending on the context you display the Job Assistant from (e.g. editing a product part). Only the steps that are

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

5–1

Job Assistant

ABC

required are shown. To edit a product part, you no longer need the job data (e.g. customer data) and, for that reason, they are not displayed there. New Job To open the Job Assistant to create a new job: 0

Start the Job Assistant with "File > New" or display the context-sensitive menu in the "Jobs" tab in the Browser window and select "New" there. The following window displays:

You enter job-specific data in "Job Data", see Administrative Data, page 9–6 for details. In "Product Part Definition", you decide on the mode you would like to work with. The data input structure of the Job Assistant varies depending on the mode you selected. For example, if you selected "Packaging" as your working mode, you only have to enter certain data. Any text boxes that are not relevant are automatically hidden by the Job Assistant. You will find explanations about the other stages and their order in Order of the Steps, page 5–4. Edit Product Part To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the "Imposition" working mode: 0

5–2

Mark your product part in the "Jobs" tab in the Browser window, then display the context-sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The following window displays:

Edition February 2006

Job Assistant

ABC

To open the Job Assistant to edit a product part in the "Montage" working mode: 0

Mark your product part in the "Jobs" tab in the Browser window, then display the context-sensitive menu and select "Edit Product Part". The following window displays:

Note: You can only edit data with the Job Assistant if

pages or 1ups were imported. If they were already 2 noimported, you can edit your job with the inspectors.

Working with the Job Assistant In the open Job Assistant, enter your data and go to the next step in the Job Assistant by clicking the "next" arrow button. The progress bar in Job Assistant shows you at what stage you are (orange dot) and what is already finished (green dot). You can quit the Job Assistant at any time and not create a job by clicking the "Cancel" button.

Click the "back" button if you wish to check and, if necessary, correct the data you entered.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

5–3

Job Assistant

ABC

When you are at the last step, you can close the Job Assistant with the "end" right arrow button. The job or product part appears in the Browser window in Product Parts, page 6–2. Your job or edited product part is not yet saved on your hard disk at this point. Now save it to your hard disk with the "File > Save" menu. Order of the Steps 1. Job Data Administrative Data, page 9–6 2. Product Part Definition Definition, page 9–14 3. Master Pages (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working modes) Master Pages, page 9–18 4. Binding Methods (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working modes) Binding, page 9–24 5. Printing Plates Plates, page 9–38 6. Folding Schemes (not in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working modes) Schemes, page 9–42 7. Assembly Blocks (not in the "Imposition / Autom. Imposition" and "Packaging" working modes) Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67 8. Cutting Die (CFF2) (only in the "Packaging" working mode) Packaging, page 13–1

5–4

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC 6 Browser Window

Browser Functionality When you open a job with "File > Open", all information about this active job displays in the Browser window. A new job created with the Job Assistant also appears in the Browser window together with all its components. You can open several jobs with "File > Open". However, only one job at a time can be "active". The data of this job are shown in the inspectors, list and graphic windows. When you open a job, this one is automatically the "active" one.Only the "active" job shown in the Browser window can be edited. To go to another open job, click the name of the job you want in the "Jobs & Resources" menu. A tick appears before the selected job that displays in the Browser window for editing (it is now the active job). Note: If you want several jobs open at the same time,

that each job needs memory. Always open 2 remember only a manageable number of jobs so as not to overtax your computer capacity unnecessarily. The window has three tabs. These tabs show you data in an easy-to-follow tree structure. You can also start many different actions with the implemented Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. When you create a job with the Job Assistant, it first appears in the Browser window but is not yet not saved. Save a job as follows: 0

Select "File > Save". See also the Save, page 12–6.

The "Product Parts", "Contents" and "Internal Marks" tabs show you all the components in the job.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

6–1

Browser Window

ABC

You can drag-and-drop PDF files, folding sheets/assembly blocks to the graphic window and place them on plates, pages or even on the paper of the job that is currently open. You can find more details about dragand-drop in What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1 or in the User's Guide.

Product Parts The open (active) job is shown in a clear tree structure in the "Product Parts" tab. Several jobs can be open at the same time but only the active job shown can be edited. You can also start many actions simply with the context-sensitive menu. The open job displays all its product parts, folding sheets, page lists and press sheets. Each of these items has its own tree structure that can be expanded by clicking the arrow before the structure. You can then see other details. Functionality You trigger the functions in the "Product Parts" tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1. 0

6–2

To open an existing job, start the Job Assistant to create a new job or import documents to the job: Display the context-sensitive menu in the "Product Parts" tab and select "Open", "New", "Documents" or "Recent Jobs".

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

Note: If you want several jobs open at the same time, remember that each job needs memory. Always open only a manageable number of jobs so as not to overtax your computer capacity unnecessarily.

2

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

To display the open (active) job with all its product parts:

0

To change the active job. If several jobs are open, activate a different job by clicking the job name in the "Jobs & Resources" menu or using the shortcut "command key + Shift". The job then displays in all the windows and can be edited.

6–3

Browser Window

ABC

0

A double click on folding sheets, press sheets or imported pages in the page list opens the relevant view in the graphic window and displays the respective inspector in the inspectors window so that you can edit them.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when a job name is selected: 0

"Job Inspector" Displays the Job Inspector. More details can be found in Job Inspector, page 9–6.

0

"Edit Job..." Displays the Job Assistant so that you can edit the job data. You can only select this function if neither pages were assigned yet nor several product parts defined. More details can be found in Basics of Job Assistant, page 5–1.

0

"New Product Part..." Displays the Job Assistant so that you can create another product part. More details can be found in Basics of Job Assistant, page 5–1 (without customer data).

0

"Save" The job you selected is saved. More details can be found in Save, page 12–6.

0

"Save as..." The job is saved, allowing you to change the job name if you want. More details can be found in Save as ..., page 12–7.

0

"Close Job" Closes the open job. More details can be found in Close, page 12–7.

6–4

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

0

"Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"..." The job is saved as a template. All the data in the job are saved and filed to "Resources > Job Templates". Exceptions: Imported pages, job number, job name, customer name and customer number. You can display the saved templates with "Job Assistant > Job Data > Job Number > From Template" or with the Job Inspector in "Job Number > From Template" and then select the one you want. Note: You must set up your own group folder before you save a template or resource. Enter the folder name you want after "Group" or select one from the list box. The template or resource is saved in the folder. See To create a group folder, page 7–5 for details.

2 0

Print Job... Opens the window for printing plates. Refer also to Print Job ..., page 12–8.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when a product part is selected (top level in tree structure): 0

"Product Part Inspector" Displays the Product Part Inspector. More details can be found in Product Part Inspector, page 9–13.

0

"Edit Product Part..." Displays the Job Assistant. More details can be found in Basics of Job Assistant, page 5–1 (without customer data).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

6–5

Browser Window

ABC

0

"Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts Templates"..." The product part is saved as a template. You can display the saved templates with the Job Assistant in "Product Part Definition > From Template" or with the Product Part Inspector in "Main Features > From Template" and then select the one you want. Note: You must set up your own group folder before you create a template or resource. See To create a group folder, page 7–5 for details.

2 0

"Product part in reader's spread" A reader's spread can be generated from a ready, job-specific product part. This reader's spread then appears in the job structure as another product part with the extension "readersspread". The reader's spread gives a true display of the product (leaflet, etc) on the screen (in the graphic window) that can be output to a printer (layout print). It has no other functions.

0

"Duplicate Product Part" The product part you selected is duplicated with all its components and filed in the job as another product part of the same name with "copy" added to it.

6–6

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

0

"Delete Product Part" The selected product part is deleted from the job.

0

"Print Product Part..." The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when the press sheet is selected (second level in tree structure): 0

"Print Product Part..." Prints the currently selected product part. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when a single press sheet is selected (third level in tree structure): 0

"Press Sheet Inspector" Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70 in the inspectors window.

0

"Print Press Sheet..." Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

"Print Product Part..." Prints the currently selected product part. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when a single page in the page list or a single 1up in the 1up list is selected (fourth level in tree structure): 0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Preview"

6–7

Browser Window

ABC

Generates previews of the pages. You can view the preview in the graphic window. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details. 0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or 1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Paste Pages from Clipboard" If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser window, you can paste it in anywhere you want. You can also use this function in the graphic window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >. This function is really suitable for positioning certain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page List" tab in the graphic window, select several pages/1ups (command key and click) and paste the content of the clipboard on the selected pages/1ups using the context-sensitive menu.

0

"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page) Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes. A blank page is pasted before the selected page. The page size defined in the scheme is used automatically. The subsequent pages with their contents shift back one page. This method is used when, for example, blank pages that were not in the PDF document must be pasted to certain positions. You can also use this function in the graphic

6–8

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >. 0

"Show Page in Press Sheet" The press sheet on which the page you are looking for is positioned is highlighted in the Browser window. The page displays in the graphic window when you double-click the press sheet.

Contents The "Contents" tab lets you import PDF and PS files to the job currently open. You can import the data to one or more layers. See chapter 10 in the User's Guide for details. Delta Lists can also be imported. The matching workflow starts for this. You will find a description in the chapter "Delta Lists Workflow" in the User's Guide. Functionality You trigger the functions in the "Contents" tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

You can import PDF and PS files to the job currently open with the "Contents" tab. Display the context-sensitive menu in this tab, click "Documents" and select a PDF or PS file.

0

You will find a description of how to import Delta Lists (.deltaExport files) in the User's Guide.

0

Import of PDF files to a number of layers for positioning by dragging-and-dropping them to the graphic window.

6–9

Browser Window

6–10

ABC

0

After the import, you can assign the pages in the PDF file to the open job (with drag-and-drop, see What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1). The pages in the PDF file are shown as a list. In the screenshot below, you can see that the PDF file, "Supercolor", has two assigned pages. Pages 3 and 4 are not yet assigned.

0

A double click on imported pages opens the "Document" tab in the graphic window and displays the Document Inspector in the inspectors window so that you can edit them.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when a PDF file or pages are selected:

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector. More details can be found in Document Inspector, page 9–82.

0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can view the preview in the graphic window. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

0

"Hires Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Hires Preview, page 4–18 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

0

"Remove Document from Job" The PDF file is deleted from the job.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Reload Document"

6–11

Browser Window

ABC

The imported PDF file is updated in the job. 0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/ 1up(s) in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Assign Pages" The selected pages are assigned to the job. The pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next blank pages in the job.

0

"Copy Pages to Clipboard" The selected page/1up is copied to the clipboard and can be pasted at any place you want, for example, in the "Product Parts" tab > "Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page List" tab. Refer also to "Paste Pages from Clipboard", page 6–8.

Internal Marks The "Internal Marks" tab shows you the marks that are in the job currently open. You can position internal marks by dragging-anddropping them to the "Marks" tab in the inspectors. You can position them in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up Inspector, depending on the parent set for the marks. Functionality You trigger the functions in the "Internal Marks" tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see Marks, page 15–3.

6–12

Edition February 2006

Browser Window

ABC

2

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

The "Internal Marks" tab lets you position marks by dragging-and-dropping them to the "Marks" tab in the inspectors. You can position them in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector or Page/1up Inspector, depending on the parent set for the marks. See Marks, page 15–3 for details.

0

When you select the "Internal Marks" folder and display the context-sensitive menu, you can create a "new internal mark" with the following editors:

Note: A user-defined internal mark is designed only for the current job and is not available later in the marks resources. More details about internal marks can be found in the User's Guide.

6–13

Browser Window

ABC

0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector. More details can be found in Document Inspector, page 9–82.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when an internal mark is selected: 0

"Edit Job Internal Mark..." Displays the editor for the marks. More details can be found in Marks Editor, page 11–29.

0

Replace Internal Mark The selected mark is replaced by a new one that you will select.

0

Refresh Internal Mark After a refresh, the selected mark shows the present status of the mark.

0

"Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard" The selected mark is copied to the clipboard and can be pasted to the marks resources in "Jobs & Resources > Marks" by selecting a folder and displaying the context-sensitive menu.

0

Delete Internal Mark The selected mark is removed from the job. If the internal mark is available as a marks resource, it continues to be available for later jobs.

6–14

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC 7 Resources and Machines

General The resources and machines must be regarded separately from the open job. You can use them as templates when creating jobs. Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG provides you with a whole series of resources and machine data sets to facilitate working with Prinect Signa Station. However, you should still create resources for your own setup. In this chapter, we will explain how you can create, edit and import resources to an active job. In Prinect Signa Station, the default view shows you the job. Proceed as follows to go to the resources view and edit or create resources: Select "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" or click the following button in the toolbar:

Two tabs with all resources and machines then display:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–1

Resources and Machines

ABC

Click the above button again to return to the job view. In the "Resources" and "Machines" tabs, it is possible for some resources to work with the MDS. See MDS (Master Data Store), page 4–17 for details.

Resources The "Resources" tab is independent of the open job. You can use it, for example, as an archive for existing templates and resources. Templates and resources are shown in a clear tree structure. You can create group folders for your own resources and templates using the context-sensitive menu. You can edit, copy, delete and resave resources. You can copy and delete templates. All the workstations can work with the same data sets if the default folders for saving resources and templates are filed on a server and assigned to the program. See also Default Folder, page 4–6.

7–2

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

Note: The "Standard" folder in the group folders is a

folder that contains shipped templates and 2 read-only resources that cannot be changed. Templates and resources are used only as templates and must be saved, if necessary, in user-specific group folders. See the procedure described below for creating custom resources. Creating Custom Resources The following procedure is recommended for creating your own resources: 1. Create your own plate template. 2. Select "Plate Templates" in the "Jobs & Resources" menu. 3. Mark the "Plate Template" folder and display the context-sensitive menu. 4. Select "New Group" in the context-sensitive menu and give it a name that you will confirm with the Enter key. 5. Open the "Standard" group folder. 6. Mark the "SM102" standard resource and display the context-sensitive menu. 7. Select "Copy Plate Template" in the context-sensitive menu. 8. Now mark the new group you created and display the context-sensitive menu. 9. Select "Paste Plate Template" in the context-sensitive menu. 10. The "SM102" plate template is pasted and you can now double-click it to edit and save it in the Plate Template Editor.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–3

Resources and Machines

ABC

Functionality You trigger the functions in the "Resources" tab with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. Exception: Working with drag-and-drop, see What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1. 0

To import resources Display the context-sensitive menu in the "Resources" tab and select "Resource...".

Select the resource you wish to import. Prinect Signa Station automatically recognizes the type of resource you selected and presents you with only those groups that are located in that path so that you can save the resource. Read the section named "To create a group folder" if you still haven't created one.

7–4

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

0

Update Updates the currently selected resources path if you are working in a network. The system looks for new or deleted groups and resources in the currently selected path. If new or deleted groups/resources are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The resources are available afterwards.

0

Refresh Machines and Resources Updates all machine and resources path if you are working in a network. The system looks for new or deleted groups and machines/resources globally in all paths. If new or deleted groups/resources/machines are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The resources/machines are available afterwards.

0

0

A double click on existing resources opens the editor responsible for the resource. The following function is found in the context-sensitive menu when a group folder is selected (top level in tree structure): 0

To create a group folder To be able to create a new template or resource, you must first set up your own group folder where you can save it.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–5

Resources and Machines

ABC

You can save a resource to the new group folder you created using the context-sensitive menu in the "Resources" tab. 0

Update Updates the currently selected resources path if you are working in a network. The system looks for new or deleted groups and resources in the currently selected path. If new or deleted groups/resources are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The resources are available afterwards.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when the folder is selected (second level in tree structure): 0

"Rename Group" You can give the group folder a different name.

0

"Delete Group" The selected group folder is deleted. You can only delete empty group folders.

7–6

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

0

"New 'resource'..." The appropriate editor displays so that you can create a new resource.

0

"Paste Resource" or "Paste Job Template, Paste Product Part Template" A template or resource copied beforehand is pasted in the selected group folder. This function is only enabled if a template or resource was copied and is to be added to a plausible level in the tree structure (you cannot copy a marks resource to a group folder for schemes resources). In the case of a job template or product part template, you can paste a template copied from the read-only standard folder.

0

"Import resource..." You can import a Prinect Signa Station resource to one of your custom resource groups.

0

"Export Group" "Don't Unpack" The elements of the selected group are copied to the defined folder. "Unpack" The elements of the selected group are copied to the defined folder. A separate folder is created for each exported resource. A ".html" and a ".png" file are filed with the actual resource. The ".png" file displays a low-resolution image of the resource.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–7

Resources and Machines

ABC

This function is for exporting schemes, for example, for use in Prinance. "To MDS..." Only active with the "Papers (Printing Materials)" resource if "File > Preferences > Import > Use MDS" is not enabled but a server is defined for MDS use. Copies local "Papers (Printing Materials)" to an "MDS_Standard" folder. 0

"Lock/Unlock Group" Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser" groups can lock or unlock group folders for other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock groups he/she locked. You can find more details about User Management in the User's Guide.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when the templates or resources are selected (third level in tree structure): 0

Rename 'resource' You can type in a different name for a resource you created. This does not apply to resources in the readonly "Standard" folder.

0

Edit Resource Displays the editor responsible for the selected resource.

0

New Resource Displays the relevant editor for creating a new resource.

7–8

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

0

"Delete template/resource" The selected template/resource is deleted.

0

"Copy template/resource" A selected template/resource is copied and afterwards can be added with "Paste Template/ Resource", for example, to another folder. Note: You can copy a "template/resource" in a read-only Standard folder and paste it then to a folder you created (that is not write-protected). In this folder, you can modify and save the "template/resource" as you want.

2 0

Lock/unlock resource Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser" groups can lock or unlock resources for other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock resources he/she locked. You can find more details about User Management in the User's Guide.

Job Templates You will find a shipped template for a standard job in the "Standard" folder in "Job Templates". The standard job is called "4711_Demo" and contains a job with eight pages for a flyer. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom job templates. Then mark the job name in the "Product Parts" tab in the Browser window and save the open job as a template with "Save job as "Resources/Job Templates"...", page 6–5.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–9

Resources and Machines

ABC

Product Part Templates You will find shipped templates for standard product parts in the "Standard" folder in "Product Parts Templates". Standard jobs have unique names. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom product part templates. Then mark the product part name in the "Jobs" tab in the Browser window and save the product part in an open job as a template with "Save product part as "Resources/Product Parts Templates"...", page 6–6. Plate Templates You will find shipped templates for standard plate templates in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Templates" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom plate templates. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Plate Templates", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Plate Template...". The Plate Template Editor, page 11–2 displays and you can now define your own plate template. Schemes You will find shipped templates for standard schemes in the "Standard" folder in the "Schemes" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom schemes. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Schemes", now display the context-sensitive menu and select

7–10

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

"New Scheme...". The Folding Scheme Editor, page 11–9 displays and you can now define your own scheme. You also have the option of studying an existing scheme with the "Open Folding Sheet Animation" function. Refer also to Folding Sheet Animation, page 12–13. Marks You will find shipped templates for standard marks in the "Standard" folder in the "Marks" resource. You can place these marks in an open job. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom marks. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Marks", now display the context-sensitive menu and select the appropriate marks editor. The following marks editors are available: Marks Editor, page 11–29, Text Mark Editor, page 11–33, Ink Pickup Bar Editor, page 11–39, Color Control Bar Editor, page 11–41 and Color Control Bar Special Editor, page 11–43. You can create your own marks using these editors. You can also import and edit existing marks with the Marks Import Editor, page 11–45. Papers (Printing Materials) This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See MDS (Master Data Store), page 4–17 for details. You will find shipped templates for standard papers in the "Standard" folder in the "Papers (Printing Materials)" resource.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–11

Resources and Machines

ABC

Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom papers. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Papers (Printing Materials)", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Paper...". The Paper Editor, page 11–46 displays and you can now define your own paper (printing material). Page and Paper Sizes You will find shipped templates for standard paper sizes in the "Standard" folder in the "Page and Paper Sizes" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom page and paper sizes. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Page and Paper Sizes", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Format...". The Format Editor, page 11–47 displays and you can now define your own page and paper size. Plate layout You will find a shipped template for a standard plate layout in the "Standard" folder in the "Plate Layout" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom plate layout resources. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Plate Layout", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Plate Layout...". The Plate Layout Editor, page 11–48 displays and you can now define your own plate layout.

7–12

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

Customer Data This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See MDS (Master Data Store), page 4–17 for details. You will find shipped sample customers in the "Standard" folder in the "Customer Data" resource. You can use these customers to create a test job. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own customer data. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Customer Data", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Customer Data". The Customer Data Editor, page 11–48 displays and you can now define your own customer data. Output Parameter Sets You will find shipped templates for standard output setups in the "Standard" folder in the "Output Parameter Sets" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own output parameter sets. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Output Parameter Set", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Output Parameter Set". The Output Parameter Set Editor, page 11–48 displays and you can now define your own output parameter set. User data This resource allows you to work with the MDS. See MDS (Master Data Store), page 4–17 for details.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–13

Resources and Machines

ABC

In the "User Data" resource, you wil find groups and users set by Prinect Signa Station for internal user management. All groups and users have certain permissions.More details can be found in the User's Guide. You can create, edit and delete users, provided that you have the necessary permissions. Report Headers You will find shipped templates for standard report headers in the "Standard" folder in the "Report Headers" resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–5 for your own custom report headers. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Report Headers", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Report Header". The HTML Editor, page 11–59 displays and you can now define your own report header.

Machines The "Machines" tab is independent of the open job. You can use it as an archive for existing machine resources. The machine resources are shown in a clear tree structure. You can create group folders for your own machines using the context-sensitive menu. You can edit, copy, delete and resave machine resources. All the workstations can work with the same data sets if the default folders for machine resources are filed on a server and assigned to the program. See also Default Folder, page 4–6.

7–14

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

Note: The "Standard" folder in the group folders is a

folder that contains shipped machine 2 read-only resources that cannot be changed. The machine

resources are used only as templates and must be saved, if necessary, in user-specific group folders. Creating Custom Machines The following procedure is recommended for creating your own machines: 1. Create your own platesetter. 2. Select the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" menu. 3. Mark the "Platesetters" folder and display the contextsensitive menu. 4. Select "New Group" in the context-sensitive menu and give it a name that you will confirm with the Enter key. 5. Open the "Standard" group folder. 6. Mark the "Suprasetter" standard resource and display the context-sensitive menu. 7. Select "Copy Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensitive menu. 8. Now mark the new group you created and display the context-sensitive menu. 9. Select "Paste Platesetter Data Set" in the context-sensitive menu. 10. The "Suprasetter" platesetter data set is pasted and you can now double-click it to edit and save it in the Platesetter Editor.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–15

Resources and Machines

ABC

Functionality You trigger the functions in the "Machines" tab only with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. 0

To import resources Display the context-sensitive menu in the "Machines" tab and select "Machine...".

Select the machine you wish to import. Prinect Signa Station automatically recognizes the type of machine you selected and presents you with only those groups that are located in that path so that you can save the machine. Read the section named "To create a group folder" if you still haven't created one. 0

Update Updates the currently selected machine path if you are working in a network. The system looks for new or deleted groups and machines in the currently selected path. If new or deleted groups/machines are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The machines are available afterwards.

0

Refresh Machines and Resources Updates all machine and resources path if you are working in a network.

7–16

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

The system looks for new or deleted groups and machines/resources globally in all paths. If new or deleted groups/resources/machines are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The resources/machines are available afterwards. 0

0

A double click on existing machines opens the editor responsible for the machine. The following function is found in the context-sensitive menu when a group folder is selected (top level in tree structure): 0

To create a group folder To be able to create a new template or resource (machine), you must first set up your own group folder where you can save it.

You can save a machine to the new group folder you created using the context-sensitive menu in the "Machines" tab. 0

Update Updates the currently selected machine path if you are working in a network. The system looks for new or deleted groups and machines in the currently selected path. If new or deleted groups/machines are detected, the number found is displayed and the first element in the list is named. The machines are available afterwards.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–17

Resources and Machines

ABC

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when the folder is selected (second level in tree structure): 0

Rename Group You can give the group folder a different name.

0

Delete Group The selected group folder is deleted. You can only delete empty group folders.

0

New Press Properties Displays the relevant editor for creating a new machine data set.

0

Paste Press Properties A machine data set copied beforehand is pasted to the selected group folder. This function is only enabled if a machine data set was copied and is to be added to a plausible level in the tree structure (you cannot copy a filmsetter resource to a platesetter resource).

0

Import Press Data Set You can import a Prinect Signa Station press data set to one of your custom press groups.

0

"Export Group" "Don't Unpack" The elements of the selected group are copied to the defined folder. "Unpack" The elements of the selected group are copied to the defined folder.

7–18

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

A separate folder is created for each exported machine. A ".html" file is filed with the actual machine. This file shows the machine data. "To MDS..." Only active with the "Papers (Printing Materials)" resource if "File > Preferences > Import > Use MDS" is not enabled but a server is defined for MDS use. The local "Papers (Printing Materials)" are copied to an "MDS_Standard" folder that is available for MDS operation. 0

"Lock/Unlock Group" Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser" groups can lock or unlock group folders for other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock groups he/she locked. You can find more details about User Management in the User's Guide.

0

The following functions are found in the contextsensitive menu when machines are selected (third level in tree structure): 0

Rename Press Data Set You can give the press data set a different name.

0

Edit Press Properties Displays the editor responsible for the selected machine.

0

New Press Properties Displays the relevant editor without any machine parameters for creating a new machine data set.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–19

Resources and Machines

ABC

0

Delete Press Data Set The selected machine is deleted.

0

Copy Press Data Set The selected machine data set is copied and afterwards can be added with "Paste Press Data Set", for example, to another folder. Note: You can copy a "machine data set" in a read-only Standard folder and paste it then to a folder you created (that is not write-protected). In this folder, you can modify and save the "machine data set" as you want.

2 0

Lock/unlock press data set Users of the "Administrator" and "PowerUser" groups can lock or unlock machines for other users. A "PowerUser" can only unlock machines he/she locked. You can find more details about User Management in the User's Guide.

Filmsetters You will find shipped Heidelberg filmsetter data sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Filmsetters" machine resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–17 for your own filmsetters. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Machines", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Filmsetter Properties". The Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 11–62 displays and you can now define your own filmsetter.

7–20

Edition February 2006

Resources and Machines

ABC

Platesetters You will find shipped Heidelberg platesetter data sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Platesetters" machine resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–17 for your own platesetters. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Machines", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Platesetter Properties". The Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 11–62 displays and you can now define your own platesetter. Sheetfed Presses You will find shipped Heidelberg sheetfed press data sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Sheetfed Presses" machine resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–17 for your own sheetfed presses. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Machines", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Sheetfed Press Data Set". The Sheetfed Press Editor, page 11–64 displays and you can now define your own sheetfed press.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

7–21

Resources and Machines

ABC

Web Presses You will find shipped Heidelberg web press data sets in the "Standard" folder in the "Web Presses" machine resource. Create a folder as described in To create a group folder, page 7–17 for your own web presses. Then mark the new folder in "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines > Machines", now display the context-sensitive menu and select "New Web Press Data Set". The Web Press Editor, page 11–64 displays and you can now define your own web press.

7–22

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC 8 Graphic Window

Graphic Functionality The graphic view has five tabs showing you five different views of the job currently selected. The graphic view changes according to the tab you selected ("Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block", " Page List", "Press Sheet List" and "Documents"), allowing you to check and edit the selected job. To edit a job, you can display the inspector for the part shown in the graphic view using the context-sensitive menu. The context-sensitive menu presents the inspector that matches the tab you are in. A change in the inspectors window is also immediately seen in the graphic window. You can drag-and-drop elements from the Browser window ("Contents" tab) and list window to the graphic window and place marks from the Press Sheet / Folding Sheet / Page Inspectors to the graphic window. Dragging-and-dropping to the graphic window is an elementary step in the workflow. You can find more details about drag-and-drop in What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1. On the pages which follow, you will learn about the wide range of functions that you can use in each tab.

Press Sheet The "Press Sheet" tab shows you in graphic form the contents of the job currently selected with all the objects placed on the press sheet.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–1

Graphic Window

ABC

You need the Press Sheet Inspector to edit a press sheet. The Press Sheet Inspector displays when you double-click the press sheet (or select it in the context-sensitive menu). A change in the inspectors window is also immediately seen in the graphic window. You can display other press sheets in the job by double-clicking them in the Browser window or list window.

Functionality

8–2

0

Display of the press sheet with the option of showing front and back at the same time. See Tile Front / Back, page 8–21 for details.

0

Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping them from the Browser window or list window. For more details, see the User's Guide or What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1.

0

Import of pages to different layers. See View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 for details.

0

Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 8–14 for details.

0

Configuration of the graphic view as you like it and display of the units of measure for objects. See View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 for details.

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

0

Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 8–21 for details.

0

Setting zero on the ruler See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

0

Working with measurement tools. See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

0

Setting magnetic snap lines See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window: 0

"Press Sheet Inspector" Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70 in the inspectors window.

0

"Print Press Sheet..." Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector" Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 9–54 or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67 in the inspectors window.

0

5 Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Arrange Folding Sheet/Assembly Block..." Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Montage" working modes.

8–3

Graphic Window

ABC

The folding sheets/assembly blocks can be rearranged automatically but also manually by entering gap data. 0

"Swap Front and Back Folding Sheet" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Montage" working modes. Front and back must also have been defined. This function is not designed for "Work-and-tumble" or "Work-andturn".

5

You can, for example, match plates to certain colors with this function. 0

"Swap Folding Sheet" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Imposition" working mode.

5

You can, for example, match plates to certain colors with this function. 0

"Move Folding Sheet" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Imposition" working mode.

5

You can, for example, match plates to certain colors with this function. 0

"Delete folding sheet/assembly block" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Montage" working modes.

5

Deletes the active folding sheet/assembly block. 0

5 8–4

"Create new assembly block" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Montage" working mode.

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Creates a new assembly block. This function is identical to that in the Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67. 0

"Duplicate Assembly Block" Prerequisites: Can only be selected in the "Montage" working mode.

5

The active assembly block with all its contents is duplicated. The duplicated assembly block lies directly on top of the original assembly block. 0

"Fit Marks and Bleeds" Prinect Signa Station checks the selected press sheet to see whether the spacing between the folding sheets or assembly blocks is set correctly for imaging. Cut marks and/or trim are automatically deleted if they overlap in adjacent blocks. It's a good idea to use this function after moving blocks manually because overlapping elements can be overlooked in the graphic window. In addition, the color control mark is fit to the sujet (AutoClip to sujet).

0

"Marks" You can open or delete a selected mark with the relevant marks editor.

0

"Graphic" "Save as..." You can save the current press sheet as a graphic file in the Portable Network Graphics Format (.png). "Print..."

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–5

Graphic Window

ABC

You can output a copy of the current press sheet to a printer. 0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Preview Attributes, page 4–17 for details.

0

"Hires Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Hires Preview, page 4–18 for details.

0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Assign Station Numbers" Can only be selected in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working modes. The function only works in conjunction with the "StationNumber" mark. See Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up, page 13–12 and Step 2: Assigning the station numbers, page 13–13 to learn how to use and handle this function.

8–6

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Display and Functions

1. Blue-and-white line Marks the maximum imaging window. The imaging window is based on the properties of the selected filmsetter or platesetter types. 2. Gray area (color can be selected) Marks the plate size. This is based on the plate size defined in the plate template.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–7

Graphic Window

ABC

3. White area (color can be selected) Marks the defined paper size. The paper size is defined in the Product Part Inspector in the "Plates" tab. 4. Green line Marks the defined paper margin (cut block) of the folding sheets / assembly blocks. 5. Blue line Marks the lead edge of print (baseline + gripper margin) 6. Red bars (color can be selected) Marks the critical printed area. 7. White punches Displays the press punches. The punches are only symbolic and don't reflect the shape they really have at the press. 8. Yellow line (not in the screenshot) A yellow frame appears around a folding sheet or assembly block when you click it. 9. Dark gray area (pages) Marks the page (imposition) or 1up (montage). The light gray area around the page or 1up indicates the trim.

8–8

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

10. Page numbers 0

White/black numbers: The page number is white if pages are not assigned and with a gray background. The page number is black if pages with or without a preview are assigned. Magenta marks without a preview.

0

Green page number: The page numbers of special master pages and tiles are green to tell them apart more easily.

Graphic Tools Measured Data

The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current mouse cursor position. You can set a measuring position or create a frame with the shortcut "command key + Shift key" while holding down the mouse button. The values in "W" and "H" refer to the width and height of the frame. Channel

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–9

Graphic Window

ABC

The "Channel" list box shows you which colors are used on the active press sheet, folding sheet/assembly block or single page. You must have an imported, separated PDF file for the multi-channel display to work. To check single separations and any spot colors, select the separation/spot color you want to check in the list box. The selected color is displayed. All colors are displayed when you select "colored" (composite view). Default setting: colored Zoom

The "Zoom" list box shows you the zoom factor in which the press sheet or folding sheet/assembly block will be displayed. To change the zoom factor, select the one you want from the list box or mark the box and type in a value. "Auto" automatically calculates and shows the largest possible full size of the press sheet or folding sheet/ assembly block in the window. Default setting: Auto(matic)

8–10

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Standard Tools

To select an object. To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. Hand tool: Moves selected objects. Click an object with this tool to move the object. To set a measuring point and create a frame: This tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the left. As an alternative to the tool: "command key + Shift key" User-defined dimensions: This tool lets you measure from one defined edge (e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined edge. Example: You are going to measure the distance between the edge of a page and that of the paper. 0 Move the mouse pointer to the page edge. 0 The starting edge is shown as a red bar. 0 Hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to the paper edge. 0 The target edge is shown as a green bar. 0 Let go of the mouse button. 0 The distance from the page edge to the paper edge is shown along a line between the red and green bar. Note: The "Dimensions" option below "View Properties" must be enabled. 0 Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete the dimensions.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–11

Graphic Window

ABC

Tile Front / Back

You can show or hide the back with the "Tile front/ back" button. You can trigger the same function with a double click on the colored caption bar of the front or back sheet. See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–4. View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers

Click the "View Properties" button to display a dialog where you can configure the way the graphic window will appear on your screen. The "View", "Dimensions" and "Grid" tabs are available for the configuration of the graphic window. Note: When you work with several languages, the

2 active layer is displayed in the "View" tab.

Select the layer you want if several layers can be shown. The active layer is shown directly in the graphic window. Several or even all the layers can be shown. Files are imported to different layers in the Browser window > "Contents". You will find an example in the User's Guide.

8–12

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

In the "View" tab, you can show or hide the following items in the graphic window: 0

Contents of Page/1up The page content appears as a preview. You can cut down computing time if the contents are hidden in documents with a large number of pages.

0

Outline mode display You can hide all symbols that are not relevant for output.

0

Imaging Window

0

Tiling Numbers

0

Background Marks

0

Foreground Marks

0

Ruler

Default: All the parameters are shown. In the "Dimensions" tab, you can show measured data for the following parameters in the graphic window: 0

Press Sheet

0

Paper Position

0

Paper Size

0

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Positions

0

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Size

0

Page/1up Positions

0

Page/1up Size

Default: Dimensions are hidden.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–13

Graphic Window

ABC

In the "Grid" tab, you can show a grid in the graphic window: You can set the size and the color of the grid. The grid is not magnetic and is only a visual aid. Default: Grid is hidden. Creating Internal Marks You can use the following marks tools in the graphic window to create "internal marks". These internal marks are not filed in the marks resources and are only available in the current job. You will find the marks that are assigned to the job in the "Browser window > Internal Marks" or in the relevant inspectors in the "Marks" tab. To add an "internal mark" to the global resources, go to the "Browser window > Internal Marks", select the mark and display the context-sensitive menu. Select "Copy Internal Mark to Clipboard" and paste the mark in "Marks Resources" in an inspector with "Paste Mark". Marks Editor

This tool allows you to display the Marks Editor the size of a rectangle you created beforehand and to create and position a mark. See the Marks Editor, page 11–29 to learn how this function works. Text mark

8–14

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

This tool allows you to create and position a text mark the size of a rectangle you created beforehand. 0

Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose size and position are that of the text mark you want. (To do this, press the command and Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button first).

0

When the rectangle is created, a toolbar appears at the bottom of the graphic window.

0

Click the text mark button.

0

The Text Mark Editor opens, displaying a text mark the size of the rectangle you created. See Creating a Text Mark, page 11–33 for details on what to do next.

Creating an ink pickup bar

This tool allows you to create and position an ink pickup bar the size of a rectangle you created beforehand. See the Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool, page 13–20 to learn how this function works. Creating a cover mark and other internal marks

This tool button allows you to create a cover mark, a color control bar or a special color control bar. You can also import a mark that you can then create and position and whose size is defined by the rectangle you created beforehand.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–15

Graphic Window

ABC

0

Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose size and position are that of the mark you want. (To do this, press the command and Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button first).

0

When the rectangle is created, you are now able to use the above tool button at the bottom of the graphic window.

0

Select the tool you need.

0

If you are creating a cover mark, see Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath"), page 13–16. In the other cases, the Marks Editor, page 11–29, the Color Control Bar Editor, page 11–41, the Color Control Bar Special Editor, page 11–43 or the Marks Import Editor, page 11–45 displays, depending on what you selected, where you can then edit your mark. The mark displays in the size you created the rectangle.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block In the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab, you will see the first folding sheet or assembly block of the job currently selected, with all the marks relating to the folding sheet. You need the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector to edit a folding sheet/assembly block. You can display the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector using the context-sensitive menu in this tab. You can also display the Page/1up Inspector if you selected a page/1up on a folding sheet/assembly block. A change in the inspectors window is also immediately seen in the graphic window.

8–16

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

You can display other folding sheets/assembly blocks in the job by double-clicking them in the Browser window or list window.

The "clip path" tool is enabled if a 1up is selected in a packaging job ("Packaging" working mode). See the chapter Packaging, page 13–1 for information about working with the "clip path" tool. Functionality

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

Display of the folding sheet or assembly block with the option of showing front and back at the same time. See Tile Front / Back, page 8–21 for details.

0

Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping them from the Browser window or list window. For more details, see the User's Guide or What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1.

0

Import of pages to different layers. See View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 for details.

0

Editing a packaging job with the "clip path" tool. See the chapter Packaging, page 13–1 for details.

0

Creation of "internal marks" for the job currently open. See Creating Internal Marks, page 8–14 for details.

0

Configuration of the graphic view as you like it and display of the units of measure for objects. See View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 for details.

8–17

Graphic Window

ABC

0

Selection of color layers. See Channel, page 8–21 for details.

0

Setting zero on the ruler See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

0

Working with measurement tools. See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

0

Setting magnetic snap lines See Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window: 0

"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector" Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 9–54 or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67 in the inspectors window.

0

"Page/1up Inspector" Displays the Page/1up Inspector, page 9–76 in the inspectors window.

0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector, page 9–82 in the inspectors window.

0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

8–18

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

0

"Hires Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Hires Preview, page 4–18 for details.

0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) or 1up(s) in the job. The pages or 1ups in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Paste Pages from Clipboard" You can paste the selected page/1up that you copied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab > "Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page List" tab to anywhere you want.

0

"Clip Path (Packaging)" This function can only be selected in the "Packaging" mode. See Editing the Clip Path, page 13–5 for details.

0

"Create New Profile" This function can only be selected in the "Packaging" mode. See the Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu, page 13–8.

0

"Mark" You can open or delete a selected mark with the relevant marks editor.

0

"Graphic" "Save as..." You can save the current folding sheet/assembly block as a graphic file in the Portable Network Graphics Format (.png). "Output"

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–19

Graphic Window

ABC

You can output a copy of the current folding sheet/ assembly block to a printer. 0

"Assign Station Numbers" Can only be selected in the "Montage" and "Packaging" working modes. The function only works in conjunction with the "StationNumber" mark. See Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up, page 13–12 and Step 2: Assigning the station numbers, page 13–13 to learn how to use and handle this function.

Display and Functions

8–20

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Measured Data See Measured Data, page 8–9 for details. Channel See Channel, page 8–9 for details. Zoom See Zoom, page 8–10 for details. Tile Front / Back

See the Tile Front / Back, page 8–12. View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers

See the View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12. Display the Marks Editor

See the Marks Editor, page 11–29. Creating a Text Mark

See the Text mark, page 8–14.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–21

Graphic Window

ABC

Creating an ink pickup bar

See the Creating an ink pickup bar, page 8–15. Creating a cover mark and other internal marks

See the Creating a cover mark and other internal marks, page 8–15. Clip Path Tool

Only in the "Packaging" mode. See the chapter Packaging, page 13–1 for details.

Page List The "Page List" tab shows you in graphic form all the pages defined for the selected product part. The pages are shown as empty pages if contents were not yet assigned or as previews after they were assigned contents. Functionality

8–22

0

Deletion of page assignments using the contextsensitive menu.

0

View of the assigned PDF file in the PDF reader. Double click on the preview.

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

0

Positioning of elements by dragging-and-dropping them from the Browser window or list window. For more details, see the User's Guide or What's Behind Drag-and-Drop, page 15–1.

0

Import of pages to different layers. See View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–12 for details.

0

"Pages per Row": Selection of how many pages are to be shown side by side in a row.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu The following functions are available when you click a page/1up and display the context-sensitive menu in the "Page List" tab in the graphic window: 0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the job. The pages in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Paste Pages from Clipboard" You can paste the selected page/1up that you copied to the clipboard, for example, in the "Job" tab > "Page List" or in the graphic window in the "Page

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–23

Graphic Window

ABC

List" tab to anywhere you want. You can also use this function in the Browser window using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs > Page List" >. 0

"Assign Blank Page" Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes. A blank page is pasted before the selected page. The page size defined in the scheme is used automatically. The subsequent pages with their contents shift back one page. This method is used when, for example, blank pages that were not in the PDF document must be pasted to certain positions. You can also use this function in the Browser window using the context-sensitive menu in "Jobs > Page List" >.

8–24

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Display

Pages per Row Selection of how many pages are to be shown side by side in a row.

Press Sheet List Display of all the press sheets for front and back printing of the product part currently shown. All the press sheets in the job are shown if "All Press Sheets" is set.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–25

Graphic Window

ABC

Functionality 0

Selection of a press sheet for viewing or editing in the "Press Sheet" tab. Double-click the press sheet you want to display it in the "Press Sheet" tab for viewing and, if necessary, editing it. The Press Sheet Inspector also displays

0

Output of a selected press sheet (highlighted by a yellow frame) via the context-sensitive menu.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet List" tab in the graphic window: 0

"Press Sheet Inspector" Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70 in the inspectors window.

0

"Print Press Sheet..." Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

"Print Product Part..." Prints the currently selected product part. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

8–26

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

Display and Function

Zoom See Zoom, page 8–10 for details. Tool bar See Graphic Tools, page 8–9 for details. All Press Sheets All the press sheets in the job are shown.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–27

Graphic Window

ABC

Documents Display of the single PDF document pages in the job or imported PDF document pages in the Browser window. You can view the single pages of a PDF file in the "Documents" tab and, if necessary, correct the trimmed size. Functionality 0

You can change the trim box interactively. You can position the yellow frame (trim box) by clicking and moving it to any position you want or you can make it bigger or smaller. You can see the data of these changes in the Document Inspector in the "Page" tab. See Document Inspector, page 9–82 for details.

0

The Document Inspector displays when you double-click a page so that you can edit it.

Functionality Using the Context-sensitive Menu The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Documents" tab in the graphic window: 0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector, page 9–82 in the inspectors window.

0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

8–28

Edition February 2006

Graphic Window

ABC

0

"Hires Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Hires Preview, page 4–18 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

Display and Functions

Measured Data See Measured Data, page 8–9 for details.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

8–29

Graphic Window

ABC

Channel See Channel, page 8–9 for details. Zoom See Zoom, page 8–10 for details. Tool bar See Graphic Tools, page 8–9 for details.

8–30

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC 9 Inspectors Window

Where You Can Select Inspectors 0

In the menu bar > "Inspectors"

0

Directly in the toolbar

0

In the Browser window either with the contextsensitive menu of a selected item or a double click on the selected item

0

In the graphic view, with the context-sensitive menu in certain displays or by double-clicking a selected section.

0

In the list view, in certain tabs, by selecting a row in the list and then selecting the item in the context-sensitive menu.

Details in the Inspectors There are eight inspectors. Each inspector has its own special task. For example, the Job Inspector is for administrative tasks, and the Product Part Inspector contains data for the entire product part. In other words, the data are applicable not just for one press sheet or folding sheet but for all such sheets in the product part. You can, of course, make changes to single elements in the Folding Sheet, Press Sheet or Page Inspector and then apply them to all the elements in the product part. A summary of the details can be found in the following inspector descriptions: Job Inspector Administrative data about the order, job and customer. Info boxes showing the "customer number" and job history. Information about the separation colors in the job.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–1

Inspectors Window

ABC

Product Part Inspector The six tabs correspond to the six successive steps in the Job Assistant (except for the first step). Only the "General" and "Plates" tabs appear in the "Montage" working mode. The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs appear in the "Packaging" working mode.

9–2

0

General Details about the working mode in the product part: - Imposition: Only with a set number of pages - Autom. Imposition: Imposing without a set number of pages - Montage: Creating assembly sheets - Packaging: Creating a packaging job - Naming the pages

0

Master Pages Details about the page type, trimmed size, additional space, trim and positioning of the pages.

0

Binding Details about the binding methods Details about creeping Automatic and manual bottling Automatic marks (e.g. cut or folding marks), details about the gripper saddlestitcher Setting parameters for automatic gap computation

0

Plates Details about plate templates Selection of the placement rule for the back (single side, work-and-tumble, work-and-turn) Paper definition Plate defined as "gang run form" Position of the sujet

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Schemes Creating a folding sheet by selecting a scheme Details about page spacing and gaps Assigning special master pages Defining the folding sheet order Creating folding sheet groups Details about bottling (from the "Binding" tab) Creating the gang run form Plate layout

0

Packaging Selection of the CFF2 file Information about the profiles and setting the profiles required Definition of the placement rule for the 1up

Folding Sheet Inspector Details about the folding sheet/folding scheme. You can enter/change some of the parameters such as the folding sheet name, positioning, sheet sizes and page spacing and gaps. Details about the marks on the folding sheet are also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks. Assembly Block Inspector Details about the assembly block and 1up. You can enter/change some of the parameters such as the assembly block name, copies, positioning, 1up format and placement rules. Details about the marks on the assembly block are also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks. Cut marks can be created automatically.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–3

Inspectors Window

ABC

Press Sheet Inspector Details about the press sheet. You can enter/change some of the parameters such as the sheet name and width, the number of colors used, selected template and paper sizes and center offset. In addition, there is a list with the folding sheets/ assembly blocks assigned to the press sheet and their details. Details about the marks on the press sheet are also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks. The Press Sheet Inspector has special control elements for optimization of jobs that were created with the "Sheet Optimizer" option enabled. See Sheet Optimization, page 14–1 for details. Page/1up Inspector Details about the trim size, about working with different layers and creeping. Individual placement options for page and 1up contents. Details about the marks on the press sheet are also displayed. You can add, change and delete marks. Document Inspector Details about the PDF documents assigned to the job, e.g. name, size, number of pages and separations in a document. Details about the trimmed size and separation colors for every data page. Placement rule in the placeholder (offset, orientation).

9–4

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Packaging Inspector See section Product Part Inspector in the "Packaging" Mode, page 13–2 for details.

Parameters of the Inspectors in Prinect Signa Station The inspectors are the main control elements for creating a job in Prinect Signa Station. The changes you make in the inspectors always affect all the parts in the job. You can find some parameters at several different places in Prinect Signa Station, for example, data about the folding sheet/folding scheme or press sheet/plate: 0

In the relevant inspectors, e.g. Folding Sheet Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector

0

In the Product Part Inspector, in the Schemes, Plates tabs

0

In the Job Assistant, in the successive steps, e.g. folding schemes, plates

The inspectors are set up in the order you would normally work with.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–5

Inspectors Window

ABC

When Do I Use What? You can create a new job only with the Job Assistant. You then use the inspectors to check and correct your data or make additional specific settings. You can also create just one part of the job with the Job Assistant and generate certain parameters later and then add them to the job, for example, a new folding scheme with the Folding Scheme Editor. In addition, you can also turn an existing job into a new one with the inspectors. As you can see, you use them as it suits you. However, you must remove any assigned data pages from a job before you make changes to it with the Job Assistant.

Job Inspector Displays, for example, when you select "Job Inspector" in the "Inspectors" menu. Administrative Data Job and Customer Job Number The job number is part of the full job name and is used for finishing, e.g. in the JDF workflow with Prinect Printready and Prinect Prinance. It can be made up of alphanumeric characters, e.g. "49rs". 0

From Template You can save the job data as a template. Do this in the Browser window by calling up the context-sensitive menu and selecting "Save job as 'Resources/ Job Templates'". You can then display this job

9–6

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

again from the "Choose Job Template" dialog (by clicking the folder button on the right) or list it in "Resources > Job Templates". The job template contains all the Prinect Signa Station job data, except for the job number, job name, customer name and customer ID. Job Name Is used to spot a job easily and is part of the full job name, e.g. "labelsSM102". Customer Name Is also used to spot a job and is part of the full job name, e.g. "Miller". Details about the customer. You can save customer data as a template and call them up again when required. 0

From Template You can save it as a template in "Choose Customer" and call it up again when required.

Customer ID Additional customer code (e.g. customer number). The customer ID is not part of the full job name. 0

Info box Details about the customer.

Full job name The full job name is made up as follows: Job number_customer name_job name.extension In our example, the full job name is as follows:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–7

Inspectors Window

ABC

"49rs_Miller_labelsSM102.sdf" Note: In "File > Preferences > General" you can dese-

single components in the "Parameters for Auto2 lect matic File Names" group. Afterwards, these components no longer appear in the full job name. Job Details Details about the target date, volume, number of layers and planned colors. Number of Layers In certain cases, PDF documents must be placed on different layers so that they can be printed one on top of the other in a job, for example, if it has several languages. The list box to the right will be enabled and the layers displayed if you enter more than one layer. You can now change a layer name in this box, e.g. by entering the language. You can output this name on the press sheet using a text mark. A maximum of 12 layers can be used. You can assign the layers certain names in "Preferences > Names" that can then be used as default layer names when you enter several layers in the Job Inspector. You can change these names at any time in the Job Inspector. You will find more details about working with several layers in Default Layer Names, page 4–8. Example of a bilingual document:

9–8

Index

Name

1

Images

2

German

3

English

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Default for JDF and job ticket This option lets you define how many colors will be used in printing when you create layouts in "JT" or "JDF". For a PDF marks layer, the composite mark that matches the colors set here is then used. It only makes sense to define colors if no content pages were positioned. If they were, the colors set for the content pages are used during output. History Created on/Modified on Prinect Signa Station shows the dates in these boxes. You cannot change them. 0

Info box Details about the job history.

Created by/Modified by The name with which the user logged in to the computer is used by default. You can change this name if you wish. Job Notes This box allows you to enter additional information about a job. You can print these notes as well, for example, as a user-specific text mark. Colors List of the colors of all PDF pages placed on the press sheets. This list is empty if no PDF page is placed so far and all the press sheets are still empty. This is where you define how layers will be output.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–9

Inspectors Window

ABC

Color Definitions Update colors Occasionally, documents or a separation color/mark are not shown in the table when you go to assign them to the job. User Color Mappings in Marks Automatic assignment of spot colors to the placeholder names of the color marks (color control bars, DIPCOs, etc.) It is possible to change this after they are assigned automatically (see in mark, page 9–11 for details). Available colors Colors that are in the PDF pages assigned to the product part. output as Click an element in this column to display the output options for spot colors. This parameter lets you replace spot colors by C, M, Y or K or by another spot color in the PDF document and print them. In this way, for example, you can replace similar looking spot colors by another color, thus saving ink/inking units. 0

as process colors The spot color is converted to the process colors C, M, Y and/or K that are written and printed to the plates.

0

is ignored The spot color is removed from the list and not printed.

9–10

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

in mark Prerequisite: The "User Color Mappings in Marks" option is enabled. Click a spot color element in this column to define in which element of a color control bar the selected spot color will be printed. The four process colors CMYK are shown first and then the spot colors. X thru V and S1 thru S16 are placeholders for the spot colors. The following is valid for your selection of a spot color you will output:

C

M

Y

0

X = Spot 1 (X)

0

Z = Spot 2 (Z)

0

U = Spot 3 (U)

0

V = Spot 4 (V)

0

S1 thru S16 = Spot 5 thru 20

0

is ignored The spot color is removed from the list and not printed in the color control bar.

K

X

Z

U

V

Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs Custom Screen Angles for Other RIPs Settings in this group do not affect the Heidelberg workflow (MetaDimension, etc.). The values are used only when you output to third-party RIPs. You can define the screen angle manually for each single color in the color table (may be necessary for some third-party workflows).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–11

Inspectors Window

ABC

To change a color, click the "Angle" column and key in the value you want. The modified screen angle is taken into account during output. Attributes You can define specific job attributes in "File > Preferences > Names". These display in this group and can be filled with job-specific data. See Free Text Replacer Names, page 4–9 for details. Procedure: For example, create a text mark with the Text Mark Editor, add "$[FreeReplacer1]" as the placeholder or the name entered in "File > Preferences > Names".

After you save the text mark, it is then positioned, for example, on the folding sheet.

After you positioned the text mark, you can change the placeholder text at any time in "Attributes" in the Job Inspector. Simply type in your text that then automatically appears immediately in the text mark. You can check the modified text at once in the graphic window.

9–12

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

This means that you can change the text of a text mark at any time without having to first position a new mark.

Product Part Inspector When you create a new job, in the Job Assistant select the working mode that you need for your product part in the "Product Part Definition" tab. You can also select a template from your resources with "From Template, page 9–14". The following working modes are available: "Imposition, page 9–15", "Autom. Imposition, page 9–16", "Montage, page 9–16" and "Packaging, page 9–17". The mode you select is shown in the "General" tab in the Product Part Inspector. The tabs that are displayed depend on the working mode you selected. Five tabs appear when you select "Imposition" or "Autom. Imposition": "General", "Master Pages", "Binding", "Plates" and "Schemes". Only the "General" and "Plates" tabs appear when you select "Montage". The "General", "Plates" and "Packaging" tabs appear when you select "Packaging". The "General" and "Plates" tabs display in all the working modes.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–13

Inspectors Window

ABC

Note: Individual changes you made to a product part

other inspectors (e.g. folding sheet offset with 2 with the Press Sheet Inspector) can be lost if you modify

this product part with the Product Part Inspector! You should give much thought to how you will create a product part, and only make changes to single objects in the product part when you are sure that you don't have to make any further inputs/changes with the Product Part Inspector. Definition Main Features Name You can type/change the name of the selected product part in this box. 0

From Template You can save the product part as a template. Do this in the Browser window by calling up the context-sensitive menu and selecting "Save product part as 'Resources/Product Part Templates'." You can then display this product part again as a template (by clicking the folder button on the right) or list it in "Resources > Product Part Templates". The product part template contains all the Prinect Signa Station product part data. The administrative data of the job are not part of the product part. See also the Job Inspector, page 9–6.

Working Mode The working mode you select defines the structure of a product part. The content of a job is shaped by what or how many working modes you selected. A job can have different working modes (product parts).

9–14

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Imposition A certain number of pages are imposed based on a folding scheme you selected. You only create as many sheets as you need for the number of pages. You define the number of pages in "Page Total". In contrast to automatic imposition, no sheets are added or removed automatically. In this mode, you can process different folding schemes and paper and plate templates in one job. This is important, for example, if the page total cannot be processed with one folding scheme (20 pages can be imposed with a 16 folding scheme and a 4 folding scheme). This option lets you modify a page total you defined with the Job Assistant. Note: Changing the page total subsequently does not

that the number of sheets are automatically 2 mean matched to this total. The user must change this manually. You can change the number of sheets in the Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab in "Number" in the table so that the value shown in "Unplaced Pages" is "0". You can also add another, suitable scheme for the "unplaced pages" using the folder button. You can also change the names of single pages, for example, to make it easier to tell the cover of a job from the body. This makes it much easier in some documents to place single data pages correctly on the press sheet. To do this, you must select the row with the page you want or a page range and then choose "Change Page Names" in the context-sensitive menu.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–15

Inspectors Window

ABC

A consecutive number is automatically added to the page name you entered (I becomes I1, I2, I3, ..) if you selected several pages. If the page name you entered is a digit, consecutive numbers are generated as page names starting with this number (32 becomes 32, 33, 34, ...). You can find more details in the User's Guide. Autom. Imposition In this working mode, an undefined number of pages are imposed automatically based on the folding scheme you selected. You cannot define a set number of pages.The required number of press sheets is created automatically (duplicates of the first sheet) when you assign data pages later. In this mode, it's not possible to combine different folding schemes. You can use this mode, for example, if in Prinect Printready you wish to process documents with a large number of pages that are assigned to a layout. The processing of books in particular is a typical case for an automated workflow. Montage In this working mode, pages are not imposed on the basis of a selected folding scheme, but single pages, also known as 1ups, are created in assembly blocks/ sheets. In this mode, Prinect Signa Station assumes that only one sheet will be needed for the assembly. An example here would be a gang run form or a large-format film. You can fill this sheet with 1ups of the pages or place the pages freely on the sheet by dragging-anddropping them there.

9–16

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

The Product Part Inspector has two tabs if you selected "Montage" when creating a job: "General" and "Plates". The "General" and "Plates" tabs are the same as in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" modes. This working mode is very suited for the production of postcards, business cards or beer mats. In addition, "Sheet Optimization" is also found as an option in "Montage". See Sheet Optimization, page 14–1. Packaging The option is only available if you have a license for "Packaging". Details about packaging are found in Packaging, page 13–1. Comment It's a good idea to comment the special features of a product part if you wish to use it as a template. Start Conditions First Press Sheet In automatic press sheet generation, you can change the starting number of the first press sheet manually. All following press sheets are incremented accordingly. Defines the start of the first press sheet in a product part. Enter a five if you want the number of the first press sheet in the product part to be a five (can be seen immediately in the graphic window and is part of the sheet label in output).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–17

Inspectors Window

ABC

First Folding Sheet This defines the number of the first folding sheet in the product part. The folding sheet number affects calculation of the collating marks (starting position) and the folding sheet label. First page You can change the number of the first page. Page numbers and page name are affected by this. Pages in Product Part / Page Names For a description, see the section Imposition, page 9–15. Master Pages "Master Pages" contain data about the page formats for the "Imposition" or "Autom. Imposition" working modes. This is where you can define the trimmed size, the trim, the page size for special master pages and the position of the page content for every master page. You can also define whether just one master page, two master pages or special master pages will be used in the product part. The values apply to all the pages of the current sheets. Master Page Types and Trimmed Size Types In this list box, you can select whether you need one or more master pages in the product part. You will only need one page type if all the pages in the job have the same trimmed size and if the user data (PDF pages) that will be assigned later have a similar struc-

9–18

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

ture. In other words, that they can be handled the same when they are being positioned within the master page. In this case, the "Current Type" list box is dimmed. Current Type 0

Right page / Left page Select "Left pages" if the user data (PDF pages) have different positions for the right and left pages. You now can specify the values for this page. Now select "Right pages". Except for the placement rule, the values for the left page also apply to the right page. This may be necessary, for example, if different positions for a left and right page were assigned in Quark XPress and there is no trim box in the PDF document.

Note: Only one page type must be created if the PDF

has a trim box because contents/pages 2 document with different positions are automatically aligned

using the trim box. You can view the trim box of the PDF documents and, if necessary, correct it in the Document Inspector. 0

Custom Select "Custom" if a folding scheme has different formats, e.g. a letterfold with shorter pages. The display/input options below are then enabled. You can also define any number of special master pages. This allows you to use different formats in a scheme. You can assign a special master page to a page in the scheme either in the Folding Sheet Inspector > Scheme display, page 9–55 or in the Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab > "Gaps and

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–19

Inspectors Window

ABC

Master Pages, page 9–45". The page then has a green page number. A case where you would use a special master page is with a larger page in an advertising leaflet or with fold-out pages in a magazine. To override the automatic trim: There are special cases where a trim must jut into the adjacent page. You can allow this by creating a special master page with a custom trim because the automatic trim cannot be applied to special master pages. 0

Setup of a special master page Click the icon below to display a dialog where you can enter a name for the special master page. The values shown or modified below it then apply to the special master page with this name.

You can delete the displayed special master page and its values from the list by clicking the trashcan icon. Width/Height You can select DIN formats and other standard sizes directly using the folder button on the right in the "Choose Page or Paper Size" dialog. You can generate and/or call up other non-standard formats in this dialog. You can also create or modify page sizes in the Browser window in "Page and Paper Sizes" in the "Resources" tab, see also Page and Paper Sizes, page 7–12.

9–20

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

You can change the values of a page manually in the text boxes. Page-related Bleed You use page-related bleed to define the area with user data that will be seen in the output. The value you enter in this box refers to the trimmed size. A value of 0 mm means that only the area of user data within the trimmed size can be seen. A value of 3 mm makes sure that the visible area projects beyond the trimmed size by 3 mm on all sides. This step is required to avoid white flashes when the motifs of the data pages only go as far as the edge of the trimmed size. Prinect Signa Station automatically makes sure that the bleed doesn't jut into an adjacent page, i.e. the value entered is applied (e.g. 3 mm) everywhere where there is enough space. At other edges, the value is reduced until both bleeds meet in the middle between the pages concerned. The text box has a default value taken from "Preferences > Bleed Default". To fit the PDF page to the trimmed size, you can select the "Placement rule for assigned pages > Automatic" option if there is a trim box. If you selected "Use custom values" in "Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance", only the values shown there are used and the trim specified here is ignored. The bleed for the pages at the back margin is set to the value defined in "Preferences > Defaults > Bleed ... in routing margin" if you use a binding method that includes a routing margin. Normally, the routing margin should not have any print data.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–21

Inspectors Window

ABC

Custom Bleed and Trim Allowance "Inner" and "Outer" always refer to two-page spreads. For a left page, "Outer" is a bleed on the left, for a right page the bleed is on the right. For a left page, "Inner" is a bleed on the right, for a right page the bleed is on the left. Custom Bleed Values In a few rare cases, you must define a custom bleed for certain margins. For example, a bleed may have to be reduced at an edge because a print control mark would be covered otherwise. The values are used if the "Use custom values" option is enabled. The bleed defined in "Page-related Bleed" is then ignored. Trim Allowance for Pages The page is made bigger by the values specified in these boxes. In other words, material/paper is added for a larger trim. This changes the position of the page on the press sheet. The trimmed size, however, doesn't change. Note: The values specified in these boxes affect the

width that you can define in the Folding Sheet 2 gap Inspector, in the Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab or in the Job Assistant. You can think of these values as a minimum gap width that are always kept even if you enter a smaller value for the gap in the inspectors or place the pages on the sheet automatically ("Automatic Gaps"). Placement rule for assigned pages This is where you set how the PDF page content will be placed within the trimmed size.

9–22

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

A trim box for the PDF page is always defined at Prinect Signa Station. This box is then matched to the trimmed size. "Automatic" mode In this mode, the trim box defined at Prinect Signa Station is automatically fit to the trimmed size. Orientation is at the bottom left corners. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is defined as follows: 0

Case 1: The PDF page has a trim box. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is then fit to the PDF trim box.

0

Case 2: The PDF page doesn't have a trim box but a crop box. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is then fit to the PDF crop box.

0

Case 3: The PDF page has neither a trim box nor a crop box. The trim box at Prinect Signa Station is then fit to the PDF media box.

"By user (view options)" mode There is no trimming in this mode. The trim box defined at Prinect Signa Station is fit to the PDF media box. 0

"Offset": 0

"From Trim Box": In this mode (as in the "Automatic" mode), the trim box is fit to the trimmed size. The bottom left corners are the reference points. You can also define settings for scaling, orientation and mirroring.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–23

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

"Center": The page content is centered on the trimmed size if you select this option. This option is helpful if the user data are centered in the PDF.

0

"Custom": This option lets you define your own offset for the data page in relation to the trimmed size in X/Y direction.

You can define settings for scaling, orientation and mirroring for all three offset types. For more details about the bounding boxes, see the section Bounding Boxes, page 3–7. Note: All settings that you define in "Placement rules

assigned pages" overwrite any settings made in 2 for the Page/1up Inspector. Binding The tab is only enabled in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes.

In the "Binding" tab, you can select the binding method, enable creeping and define values for it, enable automatic bottling, set automatic print control marks and define the gripper margin for front or back fold. In addition, you can also define parameters for automatic gap computation and assign cut blocks. Binding Methods Prinect Signa Station automatically defines the pagination and any necessary creeping for the selected binding method (pagination depends on the folding scheme/folding rule you selected).

9–24

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

The trim for the pages at the back margin is set to the value defined in "Preferences > Trim ... in routing margin" if you use a binding method that includes a routing margin. Normally, the routing margin should not have any print data. 0

Perfect Binding In perfect binding, the folded sheets are placed on top of each other, milled off at the back and glued.

Note: Automatic gap computation generates a gap

the left and right page that is equivalent to 2 between the maximum routing margin. 0

Saddlestitch In saddlestitching, the folded sheets are nested. As a result, the final page number of the assembled page not only depends on the folding scheme selected, but also on the size of the publication. In this binding mode, the application automatically pairs up the highest and the lowest page numbers and then calculates the number that each individual page will really have.

Note: Automatic gap computation set the gap

2 between the two-page spreads to 0 mm. 0

Come & Go In the "Come & Go" binding mode, the first and last book block are printed on one folding sheet, the second and second last block together, then the third and third last, etc. The folded sheets are stacked one on top of the other until the middle is reached or passed. The last fold between the two blocks is not made. Instead the sheets are cut. Now both piles of blocks are placed one on top of the other. In this way, your book is produced.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–25

Inspectors Window

ABC

Additional 1ups of parts of a book can be produced by utilizing a folding sheet to print additional book blocks that are also cut off and then gathered with the other blocks. The aim of this is to reduce the number of plate changes. Page numbering is the same as in saddlestitching. Creeping values, on the other hand, are similar to those in perfect binding. Note: Automatic gap computation generates a gap

the left and right page that is equivalent to 2 between the maximum routing margin. 0

Come & Go Two Books This option also allows you to image two book blocks on one folding sheet. One block has ascending page numbers, the other descending page numbers. In other words, mirror-inverted sheets are produced, with two whole books being imaged. This mode is used if the plates would have been necessary anyway because of the number of sheets or if rotation of the first folding sheets would result in an inaccurate production. Generally, closed and open sides of the folding sheets alternate.

Note:

2 If you create a product part in this binding mode, the number of pages is automatically doubled and twice as many folding sheets created. For example, to print a book with 48 pages, enter 48 pages as your page total. You need three folding sheets for this. Prinect Signa Station, however, doubles this number to 96 pages and 6 folding sheets. Automatic gap computation generates a gap between the left and right page that is equivalent to the maximum routing margin.

9–26

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Cut and Stack In this binding mode, a stack of sheets can be divided into two parts after printing, with one part consisting of the upper half of the page numbers and the other of the lower half. For example, in a 16-page book, one stack has pages 1 thru 8 and the other stack pages 9 thru 16. You must create a folding scheme where the page numbers make allowance for this, e.g. after folding for two pages, 1-3 (front), 4-2 (back).

Note: Automatic gap computation generates a gap

the left and right page that is equivalent to 2 between the maximum routing margin. 0

Mixed Binding This binding method includes different binding modes, namely perfect binding and saddlestitching. For example, three folding sheets are assembled to one book block with saddlestitching. Afterwards, the book blocks are compiled to one book with perfect binding or thread-stitching.

Note: Automatic gap computation set the gap

2 between the two-page spreads to 0 mm. 0

No Rule In the No Rule mode, you can create all the gaps the same, at least on the right and left. This means that all the sheets are the same, that they are not folded just cut, for example, punched sheets in a loose leaf binder.

Note: Automatic gap computation divides up the

2 available space evenly between all gaps. Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–27

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Sewn In a publication with thread-stitching, the folded book blocks are stacked on top of each other, with the sheets bound by thread. This method is analog to perfect binding but there is no routing margin.

Even pages on right This setting is for books in Arabian-speaking countries. In such countries, books are opened from left to right and read from left to right. You must create a special folding scheme for this. Creeping and Bottling Creeping For saddlestitch-bound publications (such as magazines), the paper thickness makes the inner pages shift outward (i.e., away from the spine). If the publication is trimmed after binding, the inside pages will have narrower outer margins than the outside pages. The same is true for perfect binding when large sheets with many pages must be folded often.

9–28

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

This schematic diagram shows how the required value for creeping is determined in saddlestitching. Creeping off The function is disabled and ignored. Automatic (paper thickness) The creeping values are calculated automatically from the paper thickness if you select this option. You can generate or modify the paper definitions in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in the Browser window in "Papers (Printing Materials)" in the "Resources" tab, see also Papers (Printing Materials), page 7–11. Paper Thickness Factor The paper thickness is multiplied by this factor to get the creeping you want for each sheet. See above.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–29

Inspectors Window

ABC

Manual Enable this option if you wish to enter your own inner/outer creeping values. The values refer to all the folding sheets in the product part. The data for "Inner" and "Outer" always refer to the first scheme of the product part. The program calculates creeping per sheet from these values and applies it to the entire product part. For more details about enabling creeping for a single page, see Creeping, page 9–79. Creeping Value Inner This is where you enter the value by which the innermost pages of the first scheme have to be offset to compensate for their creeping. (Creeping value) Outer This is where you enter the value by which the outermost pages of the first scheme have to be offset to compensate for their creeping. The difference between the internal and external adjusted margins is the creeping margin. By entering positive values, you will shift the pages outward; by entering negative values, you will shift the pages toward the spine. The distances between all the other pairs of pages in the book will be calculated according to these extreme values. The creeping margin values are related directly to the page spacing you have set in the scheme, see also Folding Scheme Editor, page 11–9. These values will be added to or subtracted from the page spacing. The scheme used determines whether automatic creeping is possible or whether manual creeping is necessary.

9–30

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Generally, the program can calculate the required creeping margin values itself. Creeping by Offset Is set by default and described above. Scaling Makes the pages bigger or smaller depending on their position in the scheme, while staying the same at the back margin and matching them to the nominal position on the outer edges. Note: "Creeping by Scaling" cannot be used in the

2 Delta Lists workflow. AutoBottling

Remember the following conditions when you enable this function:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

Binding Methods Automatic bottling is not allowed with "Come & Go" and "Cut & Stack" binding methods.

0

Folding Sheet The folding rule must end with a cross fold, e.g. "x1Y1", and may not have a minus sign.

0

You may not make any changes or corrections to the scheme after you enabled the automatic function.

0

In web presses with ribbons, combinations with single pages and 3/4 pages may result in problems.

0

"AutoBottling" must be disabled if you use the scheme "F16-11_li_4x2".

9–31

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Fold types "zigzag" and "letterfold" can be problematic.

0

Pagination The "Accordion Fold" pagination mode may not be selected in the Folding Scheme Editor.

More information about "bottling" and what manual corrections you can make can be found in Bottling, page 9–47. Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks Cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding sheet cuts, folding sheet labels, fold lay marks and collating marks are automatically set for the product part if you enable one of these options.

2

9–32

Note: 0

When cut and folding marks are set, the program always checks whether the gaps on the folding sheet/assembly block are big enough for the automatic marks and for the page bleed. If necessary, the marks are deleted and the bleed reduced so that they don't jut into the adjacent page. This applies for front and back printing.

0

You can make space for the marks or the bleed with the "Fit Marks and Bleeds" function in the context-sensitive menu in the graphic view if there is not enough space because you moved the assembly blocks so close together.

0

The automatic bleed is not used if a custom trim is set for a special master page. There are special cases where a bleed must jut into the adjacent page. You can allow this by creating a special master page with a custom bleed ("Master Pages" tab).

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

The cut marks and folding sheet labels are set in relation to the page and are listed in the Page/1up Inspector in the "Marks" tab (see Marks, page 9–79). The folding marks, folding crosses, folding sheet cuts, fold lay marks and collating marks are set in relation to the folding sheet and are listed in the Folding Sheet Inspector in the "Marks" tab (see also Folding Sheet Inspector, Marks, page 9–55). You can select and modify all seven types of marks in the lists of the inspectors just named or in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. In "Preferences > Resources > Marks Default" you can assign marks for these seven types of marks that are then set automatically. See also Marks Default, page 4–13. Notes on Using Marks Manually set marks are handled in the Product Part Inspector based on the following rule: The Product Part Inspector generates all folding and press sheets again if you change the layout, e.g. page size, gaps, paper size. etc. In this case, any manually set marks are lost. The layout is not recalculated and the marks are kept with other types of changes such as creeping on/off, position of the page contents, etc. You can only select automatically set marks in the Product Part Inspector. You can set manual marks in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–33

Inspectors Window

ABC

Marks colors and collating values Colors for automatic marks This is where you can select which separations will be printed with marks. Data for Collating Mark The collating mark is a control device that allows you to check whether the folding sheets have been assembled completely and in the correct order. You can use the default mark CollatingMark, a line approximately 11 mm long and 1 mm wide containing the folding sheet number, if you wish to use a collating mark. You may, however, use any mark, including marks created by yourself for this purpose. 0

Position: Back margin - At foot - Outer - At head This is where you select on which edge of the outermost page the collating mark will be found. "Back margin" is set by default.

0

Distance: Automatic - Defined This is where you can select the amount by which the collating mark will be shifted per sheet. Select "Automatic" for the offset to correspond to the height or width of the unscaled mark, depending on the direction and rotation. You can also define your own offset.

0

Range: Automatic - From: To: This is where you can define the first and last position of a collating mark on your reference side. Select "Automatic" if you want the height or width of a page to be taken as the range, starting with "0".

9–34

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Direction: Ascending - Descending - Zigzag - Zagzig In general, a thick rule is printed on the fold between the first and last pages, which is then visible on the spine of the finished folded sheet. The first collating mark is at the top of the first folding sheet. For each subsequent sheet, the rule is offset by its own length, so that for a correctly and completely assembled book, even steps are obtained. This step can be ascending or descending. Collating is ascending - descending in the case of zigzag and descending - ascending for zagzig. Note: The position must always start with "Back margin" if you select "Ascending".

2

Gripper Saddlestitcher Normally, a strip of paper/material is used to pull the folding sheets on to the saddle if a saddlestitcher is used to collate the sheets. The position of this strip on the sheet depends on the folding sheet scheme and basically means that the folding scheme is slightly asymmetric on the paper sheet.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–35

Inspectors Window

ABC

Prinect Signa Station's automatic gap computation includes the values you enter for this option and calculates all the gaps so you have the correct front and rear gripper fold after folding. 0

No rear fold/front fold

There is no gripper margin for the saddlestitcher or there is a page offset for a gripper margin for the rear or front fold. You must enter the values in "Size of Gripper Margin". 0

Size of gripper margin This is where you define the size of a page offset for the rear or front fold for the gripper margin of the saddlestitcher.

Parameters for Automatic Gap Computation 0

Use routing margin Use this option to define whether or not a routing margin will be included. You must do this if a job with thread-stitching is imposed as a job with perfect binding although there must be no routing margin for thread-stitching (see also Binding Methods, page 9–24).

Max. Head Gap/Max. Gap Width The value entered is used for the automatic calculation of the gaps (in the Product Part Inspector > "Schemes" tab) when you tick this option. The value for the max. head gap only affects the page head, the value for the max. gap width all the gaps. The gaps are created only up to the size entered, even any larger head gap, if the max. gap width is enabled. This means that the folding sheet can be smaller than the paper.

9–36

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Remember that the extra space > "Master Pages" tab is taken to be the minimum gap width and the max. gap width is added to this. The automatic gap width is used if you disable the maximum gap width. In this case as well, remember the values you entered in the preferences > "Defaults" tab. Gaps between a two-page spread such as routing margins are not affected by this. For example, if the gap at the head is always to be exactly 10 mm, then enter 5 mm in the "Top" extra space, set the max. head gap to 0 mm and tick the box. The head gap is now automatically exactly 10 mm when the gaps are calculated automatically. Cut Block Assignment In the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" modes, it is also possible to customize the cut block to meet your different needs. Cut blocks that are defined as described below are written to the data for a CIP3 or JDF output and as a result their data can be used by cutters. Cut blocks are shown as a "green line" in the graphic window. To pages/1ups The single pages on a folding sheet automatically become cut blocks. This can be a good idea if a scheme with the same page numbers, e.g. when you create postcards, was selected. Generally, however, the "Montage" mode covers this type of production.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–37

Inspectors Window

ABC

To folding sheets Folding sheets including their margins automatically become cut blocks. This is what you normally want and is the default. To scheme Only the scheme without the folding sheet margins becomes a cut block. The margins must not be in the cut block if the folding sheet is to be trimmed to size before folding. Plates List of Selected Plates The plates selected for the product part are shown in the list. Using the buttons on the right, you can load or replace plate templates to the product part or remove them from there: Folder button Click the folder button and select a created plate template in the "Choose Plate Template" window that then appears. You can now add it to the product part. To replace a plate template Click this button and then replace the plate template selected in the list by another one. Note: The paper size does not change. An error mes-

displays if the paper already defined has become 2 sage too big because of the different plate. In such a case, first change the paper size and then replace the plate.

9–38

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Trashcan You can delete the plate template selected in the list and its values from the product part by clicking the trashcan icon. Selected Plate Template This is where you can check and change the size of the selected plate template. You can also create or modify plate templates in the Browser window in "Plate Template" in the "Resources" tab, see also Plate Templates, page 7–10. Gang run form You can place different folding sheets on the plate template if you select this option. A gang run form is different from normal plate templates in that only the exact number of press sheets you set in "Number" is created. The folding schemes are placed only on the first press sheet, the others are generated automatically based on the same pattern. The position and orienation of the folding schemes is set in the Product Part Inspector in the "Schemes" tab > Active Inspector Section "Press Sheet Layout". See Press Sheet Layout, page 9–50 for details. Number This is where you define the number of press sheets that will be created with the plate template.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–39

Inspectors Window

ABC

Placement rule for perfecting Placing Mode This is where you can change the rule for generating the back sheet (perfecting). 0

Single-sided This is what you have when the front consists of single plates and no plates will be created for the back.

0

Work-and-turn This is what you have when the front and back are on one plate. As a result, you do not need a plate for the back. The stack of paper is turned after printing and printing is now on the reverse side. The operator doesn't need to load a new plate. Explanation of "Work-and-turn": The stack is turned from right to left after printing. The side that is not yet printed is printed now.

0

Work-and-tumble See "Work-and-turn", the stack of paper, however, is tumbled after printing. Explanation of "Work-and-tumble": The stack is turned from front to back after printing. The side that is not yet printed is printed now.

0

Perfector Two plates are created for printing, one for the front and one for the back. The stack is turned from front to back after printing the front. A perfector in the press very often does this.

9–40

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Sheetwise Two plates are created for printing, one for the front and one for the back. The stack is turned from right to left after printing the front. Note: For the "Sheetwise" mode (work-and-turn as well), the sujet is always placed on the plate beyond/above the gripper margin. The minimum space between sujet and gripper margin is equivalent to the page trim of the left master page. For the "Perfector" mode (work-and-tumble as well), the sujet is centered horizontally and vertically on the plate. If you want centering for "Sheetwise" as well, you must tick "Center sujet" in "Preferences > Defaults".

2

Paper Definition for Production This shows the paper that may have been selected in the Job Assistant and that you can change for the current job. The paper thickness affects creeping, see also Creeping and Bottling, page 9–28. You can assign the job a paper type or create one for it by displaying the "Choose Paper" dialog using the folder button to the right. You can also do the same for the paper size. You can also create or modify papers and paper sizes in the Browser window in "Papers" and "Page and Paper Sizes" in the "Resources" tab, see also Page and Paper Sizes, page 7–12.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–41

Inspectors Window

ABC

Sujet Position on Paper AutoPosition Sujet The lower edge of the sujet with the bleed size is positioned on the lead edge (blue line). You can change the sujet position manually if the option is disabled. Center Sujet The sujet is centered in vertical (Y) direction. Schemes The tab is only enabled in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes. In "Schemes", you check, modify and create all the folding sheets for the current product part. Besides selecting the folding scheme, you can modify gaps, assign special master pages, use the bottling function, organize your press sheet, edit gang run forms and create folding sheet groups. Page Assignment & Master Schemes (only for the "Imposition" mode) Placeable Pages This refers to the number of pages specified for the product part that are to be placed on the selected folding sheets. You cannot change the number of pages in this box. You define the number of pages in the "Definition, page 9–14" tab, "Imposition" mode.

9–42

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Unplaced Pages This shows the number of pages that still are not placed on the folding sheets created so far. In certain cases, negative values are shown in this box, for example, if the page total was reduced at a later point and there are now more folding sheets than required. The product part is ready when the number of unplaced pages is zero. List of Used Schemes This list shows the schemes selected for the product part with the number of placed folding sheets and assigned plates. Using the buttons on the right, you can load or replace schemes to the product part or remove them from there or single out folding sheets: Folder button Click the folder button and select a created scheme in the "Choose scheme" dialog that then appears. It is linked to the plate template selected in "Printing Plate", and the press sheet with folding sheet displays in the graphic window. To replace a scheme (button) Click this button and then replace the scheme selected in the list by another one. Note: The list only shows schemes with the same

of rows and columns as the one you want to 2 number replace. You can disable this filter function in the selection dialog.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–43

Inspectors Window

ABC

To single out a folding sheet (button) You can also trigger this function using the contextsensitive menu in the scheme list in "Press Sheet". See Printing Plate, page 9–44 for a description. Trashcan (button) You can delete the scheme selected in the list and all of its folding sheets from the product part by clicking the trashcan icon. Editing Schemes in the List This is where you can check and change the currently displayed folding schemes and their folding sheets. Scheme Name Displays the scheme name. You cannot edit the name. Number This shows the number of folding sheets that the selected scheme created. You can change this number, for example, to match page numbers that were changed. Double-click the box below "Number and type in the new value. Printing Plate Display of the plate template that is linked or will be linked to the selected folding scheme. Select "Singularize Folding Sheets" (either with the button on the right or in the context-sensitive menu) if a folding scheme is to be placed on a different press sheet (gang run form). A press sheet is not linked to the folding scheme. Later you can place the folding scheme on the "correct" press sheet.

9–44

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Active Inspector Section You can choose from the following four options in the "Active Inspector Section" list box: Gaps and Master Pages The selected folding scheme displays when you select this option. You now can: 0

Click "Automatic Gaps" to calculate the gaps from the paper and folding sheet size so that the folding sheets and the paper have the same size. This takes into account the set binding method: 0

Saddlestitching and Mixed Binding: Gaps between two-page spreads are set to 0 mm.

0

No Rule: Gaps are set evenly.

0

Other: Gaps between two-page spreads are set to the maximum routing margin, unless the routing margin is to be ignored during calculation. In this case, the inner gaps are set to 0.

0

Change the gaps shown for head, foot and back margins.

0

Assign special master pages. You will see the "Special master pages.." button if you created a special master page, either in the Product Part Inspector > "Master Pages" tab or in the Job Assistant. Click this button to open the "Assign master pages from list" dialog. Now select a row in the "Assigned master page" column. A list box displays where you can select the master page and assign it to the page. The page then has a green page number. You can assign different special master pages to the front and back in this dialog. This is required,

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–45

Inspectors Window

ABC

for example, if the contents have different positions. Changes to a master page on the front means that changes are automatically made on the back. You can still modify this change if you wish. or: Click a page in the scheme display to assign a master page to this page with the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. The page then also has a green page number. This requires that "several" is set in "Types" in the "Master Pages" tab. All Folding Sheets A table displays for the selected folding scheme when you select this option. 0

Folding Sheet This shows the number of folding sheets if the "Group Size" folder is open. Open the folder by clicking the folder button or double-clicking the "Group Size" name. Select at least one row and create a new group or move the folding sheet by selecting the respective function in the contextsensitive menu. 0

Create Group You can only create a new group if you selected "Mixed Binding" in the Product Part Inspector > "Binding" tab. Mixed binding includes perfect binding and saddlestitching. The sheets in a group are saddlestitched and gathered and glued before they are bound together with the other groups, for

9–46

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

example, by thread-stitching. The creeping values are calculated separately for each group. A new group will have as many sheets as you selected, ignoring any group name. 0

Move Folding Sheets This option lets you move the folding sheet as you want it. Bookbinders generally want that smaller folding sheets (half sheets, quarter sheets or even light-weight sheets) are not at the end of a book block. You can use this option to move these sheets to the position you want in the book block. (Index is the number after the box.)

0

Scheme The folding scheme name of the sheet is shown in this box.

0

Group Displays which group the sheet is part of.

Bottling This function is especially interesting for very large sheets that will be folded several times with a cross fold. The "Bottling" function counterbalances a page rotation caused by a cross fold. This slight rotation prevents wrong orientation of the pages that can occur during folding because of the large amount of material in the back margin. When several pages of a large signature are folded into each other, the vertical alignment of the pages in the bound publication is no longer exact. The pages look slightly rotated outward or inward. With the

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–47

Inspectors Window

ABC

"Bottling" function, you can specify a slight rotation in the opposite direction so that the pages are exactly aligned vertically when folded later. The schematic diagram below illustrates how the angles are determined for "Bottling". The red dots are pivot points that are clicked and from which rotation is calculated.

You will find a description of how to proceed in "Bottling" in the Product Part Inspector in "Schemes". Set "Active Inspector Section" to "Bottling".

9–48

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

You can see the currently selected plate template with the set turning type (Sheetwise or Perfector) in "On Template" above the bottling editor. Refer also to section Printing Plate, page 9–44. Bottling editor At the top of the bottling editor, you will see information about the direction of rotation when you enter a positive or negative angle. You can enter angles for all the pages in the text box below. The angle you enter is applied directly to the page and the page is shown rotated in the graphic window in the "Press Sheet" tab. The direction in which a page will be rotated depends on the type of folding and the position of the page in the scheme. In the scheme display, you can therefore determine the pivot point and the angle for each page.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–49

Inspectors Window

ABC

You determine the point around which the page will be rotated by clicking the dot at the corner concerned of the stylized page. The red dot becomes active. You can enter the angle of rotation in the corresponding text box for the page. The settings are only made for the front signature. If a back signature exists, the settings are automatically transferred to this signature. Press Sheet Layout The following functions are available for the selected folding scheme when you select this option: Exception: You can use the functions marked by "gang run form only" if the "Gang run form" option was enabled in the "Plates" tab. The defined gang run form is marked by the sign "#" in Prinect Signa Station in "List of Selected Plates". Fold Lay Mark Position (related to paper) Folding sheets are positioned at the fold lay mark you want with this automatic function. The fold lay mark is marked by a bracket in the graphic window. Position and orientation of folding sheet 1up (gang run form only) AutoArrange This function centers the folding sheets on the press sheets if there is enough room. Folding Sheet Copies Allowed This option allows folding sheets to be duplicated automatically on the plate as long as there is enough space.

9–50

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

The option applies to the scheme selected in the scheme list and by default is selected. No copies of the selected folding sheet are generated if the option is disabled for a scheme. However, you can position a different folding sheet on the plate. One Folding Sheet per Sheet This option gives you more flexible handling when generating press sheets. When this option is enabled, you can only place folding sheets with the same number on a press sheet (copies). This is helpful, for example when publishing books where, for technical reasons (color, etc) one single sheet in the folding sheet list has to be shifted. See also Move Folding Sheets, page 9–47. If several folding sheets are on a press sheet, they are all shifted when you insert one because the whole press sheet must not be changed and shifts as well as a result. The "One Folding Sheet per Sheet" option prevents folding sheets with different numbers from being placed on one press sheet. In this way, you have that only one folding sheet is shifted. Number Folding Sheets (gang run form only) Defines how many folding sheets of the same kind will be placed on the press sheet. List box (1up, 2up, 4up, 8up) (gang run form only) The folding sheet 1ups are increased by the number you select. 1up is set by default.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–51

Inspectors Window

ABC

Edit Table (gang run form only) You can change the positions of the folding sheets manually in X and Y direction. You can change the orientation of the folding sheets clockwise by 90° in a list box. Use the "swapped" option to position folding sheets from the front to the back and back again. Folder Button Lets you load a resource from the "Plate Layout" section. Graphic

Each colored element marks a folding sheet. The red line refers to the fold lay mark. The yellow folding sheet indicates that the front of the folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet. The green folding sheet indicates that the back of the folding sheet is on the front of the press sheet. Input box(es) You can define free spaces between the folding sheets.

9–52

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Folding sheets rotated (button) This function is required if you wish to change the orientation between several folding sheets. The fold lay marks are rotated by 180° when you click this button. Swap front / back (button) In practise, you generally want to use the separating line as the lay mark for the folder if you have more than one folding sheet. This is only possible if you can place normal folding sheets together with folding sheets with swapped front and back on one press sheet. Auto (list box) The "Auto" list box controls the order of the folding sheets on the press sheet. The first folding sheet is always at the bottom left in an automatic arrangement. To change the order to suit your needs, you must define all the list boxes correctly (no number twice, no "Auto"). Packaging The tab is only enabled in the "Packaging" working mode. See Packaging, page 13–1 for details.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–53

Inspectors Window

ABC

Folding Sheet Inspector Attributes You can: 0

Change the position of the folding sheet on the press sheet.

0

Change the head, foot and back margins using the miniature scheme display.

0

Apply the changes made here to all sheets of the same type.

Folding Sheet Data Folding Sheet Name This displays the folding sheet that is selected in the Browser window or in the graphic view. Details about the last folding sheet selected are shown if you haven't selected a folding sheet. Position X/Y This shows the position of the selected folding sheet on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the paper is the zero point for both directions. Sheet Width/Height Size of the folding sheet, based on the page size and gaps.

9–54

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Scheme display You can: 0

Change the head, foot and back margins, see also Product Part Inspector > "Master Pages" tab > Trim Allowance for Pages, page 9–22.

You can also change these data in the Product Part Inspector, page 9–13, Schemes tab, Gaps and Master Pages, page 9–45. Apply to folding sheets of same kind Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/ changes you made to all other folding sheets of the same type in the product part. Marks The "Marks" tab is the same in all the inspectors that deal with marks. Make sure that the mark you have set displays in its proper inspector. This is where you can position any marks for the selected folding sheet/assembly block. You can also set cut marks, folding marks, folding crosses, folding sheet cuts and collating marks in this dialog. The width and height of the mark are shown in the "Expert Mode". In addition, you can define the clipping region of a mark (part that will be imaged) and/ or imaging in the background. You can apply all the changes you made in this dialog to all surfaces and folding sheets of the same type in the product part. You can find more details about marks in the User's Guide.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–55

Inspectors Window

ABC

Marks List Surfaces This is where you can select whether the marks will be listed or not: For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and back) or only for front or only for back or: For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1, web 2, web 3 or web 4 You can add or remove table columns (bold headings) with "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu. You can select columns in the "Customize List View" dialog than then displays and click the button you want. By defining the order in "View Fields", you define the column positions in the list from left to right. The column setup is saved in Prinect Signa Station and is available for all jobs. The list can have the following columns that can be hidden if the inspectors window is not opened wide enough. The scroll bar displays in this case.

No.

Order in the list.

Icon

The mark icon is displayed.

Name

The mark name is displayed.

Reference Point

This column displays the reference point for the mark.

Hotspot

Position of the hotspot in the mark (important for the mark to snap to position in relation to the reference point).

9–56

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Hotspot XY

Coordinates of the hotspot position in the mark.

Layer

Shows whether the mark is set in the foreground or background of the page content.

Absolute Offset

Coordinates of the distance to the bottom left corner of the object for which a mark is set, for example, in the Folding Sheet Inspector for the folding sheet, in the Press Sheet Inspector for the paper, plate or sujet.

Margin

The part of the mark that is cut off is displayed as is shown later in "Clippath" in the inspectors window.

Color

This column displays the separation on which the mark will be printed.

Mark Type

Shows the mark type as was selected in the preferences or in the Marks Editor.

Surface (only Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector and Press Sheet Inspector)

This column displays the surface on which the mark is located: For sheetfed offset: Single-sided, all surfaces, front or back For web offset: "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1, web 2, web 3 or web 4

Parent (only Press Sheet Inspector)

This shows whether the mark refers to the paper, plate or sujet.

Except for the last two rows, you can select the other rows in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector and Page/1up Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–57

Inspectors Window

ABC

The folding and collating marks are the only automatically set marks that are shown in the list. The automatically set cut marks refer to the page/1up and are listed in the Page/1up Inspector > "Marks" tab (a page must be selected in the graphic window). All the marks are displayed, irrespective of type and reference, in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting marks, see Marks Resources, page 9–65. The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are enabled when you select one or more marks in the list. These sections then show the data for the mark selected. In multiple selection, the data of the first mark selected are displayed. The selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. You can also change the order of the marks by clicking a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. It may be a good idea to change the order in some situations because the mark listed first is the last one to be imaged and hides other marks below it. Click the folder button on the right and add a mark from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that then appears. You can also add marks by dragging and dropping them from the marks resources in the Browser window to the list. When you add marks, they are shown in the list and in the graphic view because they were set in relation to the folding sheet/ assembly block. Marks added in this way always have "X=0/Y=0" as a reference point or "Lower left" in the other inspectors. Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that

you can only set tiling marks with the Plate 2 reason, Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.

9–58

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all surfaces (front or back) in the product part by clicking the icon below.

You can copy all marks on the front to the back by clicking the icon below.

You can replace the selected mark(s) by a new one that you will select by clicking the icon below.

You can edit the selected mark with the relevant editor by clicking the icon below.

You can delete the selected mark(s) from the list by clicking the trashcan icon. You can create or change marks as well using the context-sensitive menu in the Browser window in "Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspector.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–59

Inspectors Window

ABC

Cut Marks - Folding Marks - Collating Mark - Folding Crosses - Folding Sheet Cuts The marks are automatically set for the folding sheet if you enable one of these options. They are removed if you disable the option. You can see which marks are set or removed in the "Marks List" and in the graphic window. Cut marks (page-related) that you set or remove are shown and hidden respectively in the "Page Inspector > Marks". Click the "Apply to folding sheets of same kind" button if the product part has other folding sheets that are to be changed. Note: A mark type must be set again if you change the

for this mark type in the preferences for a par2 default ticular job. You must do this so that the new mark displays in the graphic view, is added as an internal mark of the job and displays in the Browser window. Selected Mark The following parameters of a mark selected in the list are enabled and can be changed if needed: Group/Name This displays the resources group and the name of the selected mark. The resources group and the name of the first selected mark are shown if you selected several marks. Color This is where you can select which separation will be printed with the mark.

9–60

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Reference Point This option lets you select one of the reference points available for the selected mark. The bottom left corner of the folding sheet is the reference point, either "Lower left" or "x=0/y=0". Starting there, you move in single steps to the right (x direction) and/or to the top (y direction) like in an axis system. In the Folding Sheet Inspector, the reference points have digits, e.g. "x=1/y=1" because every folding line in the scheme can be a reference point. In the Press Sheet and Page/1up Inspectors, words are used, e.g. "Lower middle".

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–61

Inspectors Window

ABC

Examples:

9–62

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Position X/Y This option lets you position the selected mark as you want it in x/y direction in relation to its assigned reference point. The selected reference point can be, for example, x=1/y=0.

Scale/Orientation You can scale the selected mark up or down and rotate it by the degrees specified. With orientation, the mark is rotated counterclockwise around the hotspot of the mark. Expert Mode In this section, you can select whether the selected mark will be printed in the foreground or background of the page content. The width and height of the selected mark is also specified. This value is defined by its scale and cannot be changed. Clippath This option lets you cut off a part of the selected mark, for example, to print only a part of a color control bar. The value entered is cut off from the original size like a margin on the top, bottom, left or right.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–63

Inspectors Window

ABC

The original size of the mark, however, doesn't change. Values for left and right can already be available for the color control bar if the bar was already matched to the sujet.

0

Measurement tool button

You can define a clipping region for a mark in the graphic view after you click this button: 1. Select the mark in the list or double-click it in the graphic view. 2. You should zoom up the mark in the graphic view (approx. 200%).

9–64

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

3. Using the command + Shift keys and holding down the mouse button, you can now create a rectangular box within the mark (orange frame).

4. The measurement tool button is enabled when you release the mouse button and then the two keys. 5. Click the button to add the values to the boxes on the left. Apply to folding sheets of same kind Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/ changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all other folding sheets of the same type in the product part. Marks Resources Apart from the "Internal Marks", the "Marks Resources" tab is identical to that in "Jobs & Resources > Marks" and is used to position marks to an active job by dragging-and-dropping them there. You will also find the "Marks Resources" tab in the Press Sheet Inspector, Page/1up Inspector, Assembly Block Inspector and Plate Template Editor. Drag-anddrop works always the same way, what matters is from which inspector the marks come from. The following consellation are possible: In the Press Sheet Inspector, you can select a mark and drag-and-drop it from there to the graphic window to the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–65

Inspectors Window

ABC

Block" and "Press Sheet List" tabs. You will see the possible reference points if you move a mark to the graphic window holding down the mouse button. The marks are always positioned on the press sheet and appear in the "Marks" tab in the Press Sheet Inspector. In the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, you can drag-and-drop a mark from there to the graphic window to the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Press Sheet List" tabs. You will see the possible reference points and the highlighted selected folding sheet/assembly block if you move a mark to the graphic window holding down the mouse button. The marks are always positioned on the folding sheet/ assembly block and appear in the "Marks" tab in the Folding Sheet Inspector. In the Page/1up Inspector, you can drag-and-drop a mark from there to the graphic window to the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" and "Press Sheet List" tabs. You will see the possible reference points and the highlighted selected page if you move a mark to the graphic window holding down the mouse button. The marks are always positioned on the page/1up and appear in the "Marks" tab in the Page/1up Inspector.

9–66

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

2

Note: 0

CoverClippath marks are page-related marks and, for that reason, can only be set with the Page/1up Inspector.

0

Tiling marks are paper-related marks and, for that reason, can only be set with the Plate Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector.

Assembly Block Inspector The Assembly Block Inspector is primarily for editing jobs you created in the "Montage" working mode. Exception: You must edit jobs that were created with the "Sheet Optimization" option in the Press Sheet Inspector. Attributes Assembly Block Parameters Block Name This box displays the block name that was assigned in the Job Assistant and is selected in the Browser window or in the graphic view. The details are dimmed and cannot be edited if you haven't selected a block name. You can change the name afterwards. You can create a new assembly block by clicking the icon below.

You can delete the assembly block from the list by clicking the trashcan icon.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–67

Inspectors Window

ABC

Note: You must create several assembly blocks if you

different motifs. In other words, an assembly 2 have block can only have several 1ups of one motif. Copies X/Y

In these boxes, you can define how often a 1up in the assembly block will be created in X (horizontal) or Y (vertical) direction. Fill Sheet Starting from the present position of the assembly block on the press sheet, as many 1ups as will fit on the press sheet will be created to the right, left and/or on top. Gaps X/Y If an assembly block has several 1ups, you can specify the gaps between the 1ups in X and Y direction. Position X/Y This shows the position of the selected assembly block on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the paper is the zero point for both directions. Margin, left / right / top / bottom You can enter a margin for the assembly block in these boxes. A cut mark is not placed if this margin is smaller than the cut mark. This allows the cut point for assembly blocks to be set accurately without the automatically set cut marks disturbing this setting.

9–68

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

1up Definition Width/Height The size of the 1up is specified. Trim The trim width is shown. Prinect Signa Station makes sure automatically that trims do not overlap in an assembly bock. Orientation You can rotate the 1ups on the selected assembly block by the specified degrees with this option. Special angle Click "On". You can enter an angle by which the 1ups on the selected assembly block will be rotated. Pivot is bottom left. This is used for envelopes, for example, to align the rear flap of the envelope correctly (35°). Placement rule for assigned 1ups You can find a description of this in the Placement rule for assigned pages, page 9–22. Marks You can find a description of this in the Marks, page 9–55. Difference to above description: In contrast to the Folding Sheet Inspector, you can only change the automatically set cut marks in the Assembly Block Inspector but not the folding marks, collating mark, folding crosses and folding sheet cuts.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–69

Inspectors Window

ABC

Marks Resources You can find a description of this in the Marks Resources, page 9–65.

Press Sheet Inspector Press Sheet Management Data Sheet Name This displays the name of the press sheet that is selected in the Browser window or in the graphic view. A name change is also shown in the product part (Browser window). The system checks whether the job name is unique. A message displays if a name was assigned twice. A unique name is important for finishing, e.g. for tiled sheets. Note: A change in the sheet name is also reflected in

internal sheet name, e.g. in the .cip file for finish2 the ing (0001#Sheet 1 #A__Name). Plate Width / Height The size of the plate is shown. You can also see these data in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab. Centering The entire sujet (not the single folding sheet) is centered automatically either horizontally, vertically or in both directions on the press sheet.

9–70

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Sheet Optimization (only in the "Montage" working mode) This section is only active when jobs are open with the "Sheet Optimization" option enabled. You can find a description of "Sheet Optimization" in the section Sheet Optimization, page 14–1. Press Sheet Parameters Used Colors Number of colors/separations that will be printed on the press sheet. This information only displays if data pages are assigned to the job/product part. Plate template Display of the plate template name that was entered in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab or in the Job Assistant. Papers This shows the paper that was selected in the Job Assistant or in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab and that you can change for the current job. Paper Width / Paper Height These boxes display the paper width / paper height that you can change if required. Paper Center Offset The offset in this case is different to the center offset of the folding scheme. In this case, it is the offset of the paper from the middle of the press sheet (horizontal) (see also X offset in the Plate Template Editor).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–71

Inspectors Window

ABC

Normally, the value is '0', and the paper lies at the middle of the press sheet along the horizontal axis. You can enter a horizontal offset in this box if the normal case is not correct for printing reasons. Positive values shift to the right, negative values to the left. The reverse side is matched automatically. Baseline Display and, if necessary, correction of the distance of the paper from the leading edge of the plate. Positive values move the paper away from the plate edge, i.e. to the top, negative values move the paper down. Assigned Folding Sheets/Assembly Blocks All the folding sheets/assembly blocks on the press sheet are listed. Details about a sheet/block are enabled when you select the sheet/block. Name This displays the folding sheet/assembly block that is selected in the list. Position X/Y This shows the position of the selected folding sheet/ assembly block on the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the paper is the zero point for both directions. Orientation You can rotate the folding sheet/assembly block with this option.

9–72

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Apply to press sheets of same kind Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/ changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other press sheets of the same type in the product part. Marks This parameter lets you position any marks in relation to the paper, plate or sujet (bounding box around printed area on the sheet). The width and height of the mark are shown in the "Expert Mode". In addition, you can define the clipping region of a mark (part that will be imaged) and/or imaging in the background. You can apply all the changes you made in this dialog to all surfaces and press sheets of the same type in the product part. You can find more details about marks in the User's Guide. Marks List Surfaces This is where you can select whether the marks will be listed or not: For sheetfed offset such as "All Surfaces (front and back) or only for front or only for back or: For web offset such as "Top" and "Bottom" for web 1, web 2, web 3 or web 4 See the Marks List, page 9–56 for a description of the list.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–73

Inspectors Window

ABC

The list only shows marks that refer to the paper, plate or sujet (bounding box around printed area on the sheet). The automatically set cut marks, folding marks and collating mark refer to the page/1up or the folding sheet and are not displayed in this list but only in the list in their respective inspectors. For more details about setting marks, see Marks Resources, page 9–65. The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sections then show the data for the mark selected. The selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in the graphic view in the > "Press Sheet" tab. You can also change the order of the marks by clicking a mark in the Context-sensitive menu. Click the folder button on the right and add a mark from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that then appears. You can also add marks by dragging and dropping them from the marks resources in the Browser window to the list. The marks are set referring to what you selected, "Paper" "Plate" or "Sujet". You can of course change this reference. Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that

you can only set tiling marks with the Plate 2 reason, Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector. You can delete the selected mark from the list by clicking the trashcan icon.

You can apply the selected mark(s) and its data to all surfaces in the product part by clicking the icon below.

9–74

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

You can create or change marks as well using the context-sensitive menu in the Browser window in "Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspector. Selected Mark See Selected Mark, page 9–60 for a description. In addition to the above description, you can also select: Parent: Paper / Plate / Sujet You can assign a mark that refers to the paper, plate or sujet (bounding box around printed area on the sheet), for example, a sheet lay mark for the paper, an ink pickup mark in web offset (random dot) for the plate and a color control bar for the sujet. Expert Mode See Expert Mode, page 9–63 for a description. Apply to press sheets of same kind Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/ changes you made in the "Press Sheet" tab to all other press sheets of the same type in the product part. Marks Resources You can find a description of this in the Marks Resources, page 9–65.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–75

Inspectors Window

ABC

Page/1up Inspector Attributes Trimmed Format This shows the current trimmed size of the selected page or 1up. You cannot change this data. Position X/Y The position of the selected page refers to the bottom left corner of the folding sheet. Width/Height In folding sheets, the values are the same as the data of the master page, in assembly blocks as the data of the 1up definition. They show the trimmed size. Orientation The setting is taken from the defined master page or from the 1up definition. Active Layer This is where you can select a layer to be able to make a change to it. The selected layer is shown in the graphic view. You can create the layers for the product part in the Job Inspector > "General" tab or in the Job Assistant. A maximum of 12 layers can be used. You will find more details about working with several layers in Number of Layers, page 9–8 or View Properties and Enable/Disable Layers, page 8–21.

9–76

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Trim This box displays the value for the selected page, and you can change it if required. Generally, you don't need to change this value because it was calculated correctly on the basis of the master page. Positive values move the trim away from the page, negative values move it in towards the page. The trim specified in the master pages refers to all the pages in the product part (see also Product Part Inspector > Master Pages, page 9–18). Clip path Can only be used in the "Packaging" mode. More details can be found in the "Packaging" chapter, 1up Inspector, page 13–4. Placement rule for assigned page/1up You can find a description of this in the Placement rule for assigned pages, page 9–22. Additional functions for the Page/1up Inspector 0

Measurement tool button The Page/1up Inspector has a "Measurement tool" button on the right besides the text boxes for "Offset X/Y" in the "By user (view options) > Offset > Custom" option.

This tool lets you define an exact visual offset for a selected page/1up in the graphic window > "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–77

Inspectors Window

ABC

0

Click the selected page/1up you wish to move while holding down the command + Shift keys.

0

Holding down the mouse button, now create a square that defines the offset in X and Y direction (the opposite edge defines the new position).

0

The measurement tool button is enabled when you release the mouse button and then the two keys.

0

Now click the button to apply the data of the square you created to the boxes and trigger the offset.

Only one page may be selected with this function. Note: This function is a very useful one especially

the packaging mode to match the 1up to the 2 incutting die. In the punch outline of the 1up, select a certain feature (e.g. intersection of two lines) and use the measurement tool on the corresponding feature of the CFF2 outline (magenta-colored line). The 1up is positioned exactly to the CFF2 punch outline if you follow the procedure described above. 0

Offset/scaling with the arrow keys You can use offset or scaling accurately when you click the offset or scaling box with the mouse cursor and then with the arrow keys.

0

Scaling / orientation Scaling and orientation of the contents are only applied to the scheme and not to the document. An advantage of this is that when you assign a new document to the scheme the pages are loaded to the scheme with defined settings.

9–78

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Creeping On The creeping values currently applicable for a page are shown and a tick is set if creeping was enabled when you created the product part, In some cases, however, creeping must not be enabled (image runs over back margin). You then disable this option by removing the tick from the box (see also Product Part Inspector > Creeping and Bottling, page 9–28). Apply Rule to All Pages The settings you defined for the selected page are applied to all pages in the product part. Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in

Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences > 2 Page Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the function to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with it. Marks This is where you can position any marks for the selected page/1up. The width and height of the mark are shown in the "Expert Mode". In addition, you can define the clipping region of a mark (part that will be imaged) and/or imaging in the background. You can find more details about marks in the User's Guide. Marks List See the Marks List, page 9–56 for a description of the list. Automatically set cut marks that are shown in the list. The automatically set folding and collating marks refer to the folding sheet/assembly block and

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–79

Inspectors Window

ABC

are listed in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector > "Marks" tab. However, all the marks are displayed in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. For more details about setting marks, see Marks Resources, page 9–65. The "Selected Mark" and "Expert Mode" sections are enabled when you select a mark in the list. These sections then show the data for the mark selected. The selected mark is highlighted by an orange square in the graphic view in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. You can also change the order of the marks by clicking a mark in the Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. Click the folder button on the right and add a mark from the resources in the "Choose Mark" dialog that then appears. You can also add marks by dragging and dropping them from the marks resources in the Browser window to the list. When you add folding and collating marks, they are shown in the list and in the graphic view because they were set in relation to the page/1up. Note: Tiling marks always refer to the paper. For that

you can only set tiling marks with the Plate 2 reason, Template Editor or the Press Sheet Inspector. You can delete the selected mark from the list by clicking the trashcan icon.

You can create or change marks as well using the context-sensitive menu in the Browser window in "Marks" in the "Resources" tab or in the "Marks Resources" tab in the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector, Press Sheet Inspector or Page/1up Inspector.

9–80

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Selected Mark See Selected Mark, page 9–60 for a description. In addition to the above description, you can also select: Expert Mode See Expert Mode, page 9–63 for a description. Apply to all pages/1ups Click this button if you wish to apply all the inputs/ changes you made in the "Marks" tab to all other pages/1ups in the product part. Note: Remember the "Restrict 'Apply' functions in

Inspector" check box in "File > Preferences > 2 Page Defaults > Several Switches". You can restrict the function to the selected folding sheet/assembly block with it. Marks Resources You can find a description of this in the Marks Resources, page 9–65.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–81

Inspectors Window

ABC

Document Inspector Document This provides you with general information about the document you have currently selected. Properties The properties of the selected PDF document are shown. If your job/product part has several PDF documents, then information about the PDF selected in the Browser window or in the list is shown. The information comes from the layout application. Note: Acrobat Distiller automatically starts if a Post-

Script document is to be processed with Prinect Signa 2 Station and converts it to a PDF document. You don't have to remember any special settings in Acrobat Distiller because this is taken care of by the job options in Prinect Signa Station. You must enable the following options for your setup in "Preferences > Adobe PDF Settings > Advanced" if Acrobat Distiller runs on a different computer for the conversion of a PostScript document to a PDF document: 0

Process DSC Comments

0

Preserve Document Information from DSC

Available colors The colors used in the entire document, including spot colors, are shown in this list. If you are working with separated PDF, you can change the color names in the table by double-clicking the table item. The new name is then used in the job.

9–82

Edition February 2006

Inspectors Window

ABC

Page This provides you with information about the page you have currently selected. Area of application This parameter lets you define where the changes will be applied if changes are made in "Trim box". The default setting is "selected". The selected page and PDF file are shown in the caption bar of the inspectors window. You can also select "even" where all even pages will be changed, "odd" for changes to all odd pages and "all" where all pages of the selected PDF file will be changed. Trim box Rel. position X/Y This option lets you move the trim box relative to the content of a PDF page. As a result, the motif can be in a different position in the trim box. The bottom left corner is the reference point. This can be used in PDF page assignment if the following setting was selected for the master page in the "Product Part Inspector > Placement rule for assigned pages/1ups": 0

"Automatic" mode or

0

"By user (view options)" mode with "From trim box" offset.

A change in the size of the trim box (in the graphic view > "Document" tab) does not affect positioning. Only the position of the bottom left corner is important.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

9–83

Inspectors Window

ABC

You will find a description of the bounding boxes (e.g. trim box) in the section Bounding Boxes, page 3–7. You can read how Prinect Signa Station evaluates the bounding boxes in the PDF file in the section Placement rule for assigned pages, page 9–22. Width/Height The trim box size is shown in these boxes. Use the button to the right to return at any time to the original size of the trim box. Scale X/Y The PDF page is scaled during placement but only if the placement rule for assigned pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page. Orientation The PDF page is rotated during placement but only if the placement rule for assigned pages is set to "Automatic" in the master page. Note: Scaling and orientation of the contents are only

to the document and not to the layout/ 2 applied scheme as in the Page/1up Inspector. The advantage

of this, when working with Prinect Printready, for example, is that, if you want to use a different scheme for the document, you only need to replace the scheme without having to enter your data again. You can assign the data described here to a PDF page in Prinect Printready as well. Prinect Signa Station uses them and shows them in this inspector. Available colors The colors used in the selected page, including spot colors, are shown in this list.

9–84

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC 10 List Window

List Functionality The list window shows you the contents of the currently selected job as a table. The list window has five different tabs. All of these tabs show you data as lists. You can also start many different actions with the implemented Context-sensitive menu, page 2–12. If a job has several product parts, only the content of the currently selected product part is shown in the "Press Sheet", "Folding Sheet" and " Page List" tabs. The "Assigned" and "Not assigned" tabs refer to the job and show you data relating to the whole job. The list window is a supplement to the Browser and graphic window. It shows details about parameters such as format, paper size, etc. Like in the Browser window, you can also drag-anddrop pages from this window to the graphic window and position them in the open job. You can decide on the parameters you want to show in all the tabs of the list window. You can also show and hide hierarchy levels and edit columns: 1. Display the context-sensitive menu by clicking the caption bar with the parameter names shown in bold:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–1

List Window

ABC

You can view different parameters in each tab. You can find more about which parameters you can view in the various tabs in the descriptions below. You can hide the list window permanently if you want. If you want a bigger graphic window, deselect the "List View" option in "File > Preferences > General". The setting does not affect an open job.

Press Sheet The "Press Sheet" tab lists all the press sheets in a job or, if you have several product parts, the press sheets in the selected product part. The parameters of the sheets are also shown. You can configure which parameters will be shown in the "Press Sheet" tab as follows: 1. You can decide which columns will be shown by selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu (see List Functionality, page 10–1). The following window displays:

10–2

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

The left column shows you all the parameters that can be displayed in the "Press Sheet" tab. The right column lists the parameters that are actually shown. To add parameters: 2. Select a parameter in the left column and click "Add Column". The parameter appears in the right column and is shown afterwards in the list window. 3. Below the right column are arrow keys that you can use to define the order of the parameters going from left to right. The first parameter then appears on the left in the list window. 4. Quit the dialog by clicking "OK".

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–3

List Window

ABC

5. Taking the parameters configured in the screen shot above, you will now see the parameters in your list window as follows:

Functionality 0

A double click on a row or a single click if the Press Sheet Inspector is displayed Opens that press sheet in the graphic window. The same press sheet is marked in the Browser window. The Press Sheet Inspector displays in the inspectors window so that you can edit the press sheet.

The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Press Sheet" tab in the list window with a press sheet selected: 0

"Press Sheet Inspector" Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70 in the inspectors window.

0

"Print Press Sheet..." Prints the currently selected press sheet. The Print Job ..., page 12–8 window displays.

0

"Save Table as HTML File..." You can save the listed information (tables) as a HTML file (for checking purposes).

0

"Print Table..." In the List Functionality, page 10–1, you can print the listed information (tables) to a printer.

10–4

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

Folding Sheet The "Folding Sheet" tab lists all the folding sheets in a selected product part. The parameters of the sheets are also shown. You can configure which parameters will be shown in the "Folding Sheet" tab as follows: 1. You can decide which columns will be shown by selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu (see List Functionality, page 10–1). The following window displays:

The left column shows you all the parameters that can be displayed in the "Folding Sheet" tab. The right column lists the parameters that are actually shown. 2. Continue as described in step 2 on page 10–3.To add parameters:, page 10–3

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–5

List Window

ABC

Functionality 0

A double click on a row or a single click if the Folding Sheet Inspector is displayed Opens that folding sheet in the "Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. The selected folding sheet is marked in the Browser window. The Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector displays in the inspectors window so that you can edit the folding sheet.

The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Folding Sheet" tab in the list window with a folding sheet selected: 0

"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector" Displays the Folding Sheet Inspector, page 9–54 or the Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67 in the inspectors window.

0

"Press Sheet Inspector" Displays the Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70 in the inspectors window.

0

"Save Table as HTML File..." You can save the listed information (tables) as a HTML file (for checking purposes).

0

"Print Table..." In the List Functionality, page 10–1, you can print the listed information (tables) to a printer.

Page List The "Page List" tab shows you all the pages that were defined in the product part. The relevant parameters are listed.

10–6

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

You can configure which parameters will be shown in the "Page List" tab as follows: 1. You can decide which columns will be shown by selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu (see List Functionality, page 10–1). The following window displays:

The left column shows you all the parameters that can be displayed in the "Page List" tab. The right column lists the parameters that are actually shown. 2. Continue as described in step 2 on page 10–3.To add parameters:, page 10–3 Functionality 0

A double click on a row or a single click if the Page/1up Inspector is displayed Displays that page or 1up in the "Page List" tab in the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is marked in the Browser window. The Page Inspec-

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–7

List Window

ABC

tor displays in the inspectors window so that you can edit the page or 1up. The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Page List" tab in the list window with a page selected: 0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s) in the job. The pages in the job no longer have any assigned content.

0

"Paste Pages from Clipboard" If you copied a page or 1up from a PDF file to the clipboard in the "Contents" tab in the Browser window, you can paste it in anywhere you want. You can also use this function in the graphic window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >. This function is really suitable for positioning certain pages/1ups several times. In the "Page List" tab in the graphic window, select several pages/1ups (command key and click) and paste the content of the clipboard on the selected pages/1ups using the context-sensitive menu.

0

10–8

"Assign Blank Page" (add a blank page)

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

Can only be selected in the "Imposition" and "Autom. Imposition" working modes. A blank page is pasted before the selected page. The page size defined in the scheme is used automatically. The subsequent pages with their contents shift back one page. This method is used when, for example, blank pages that were not in the PDF document must be pasted to certain positions. You can also use this function in the graphic window in the context-sensitive menu in "Page List" >. 0

"Save Table as HTML File..." You can save the listed information (tables) as a HTML file (for checking purposes).

0

"Print Table..." In the List Functionality, page 10–1, you can print the listed information (tables) to a printer.

Assigned The "Assigned" tab shows you all the pages that were imported and positioned in the current job. The relevant parameters are listed. You can configure which parameters will be shown in the "Assigned" tab as follows: 1. You can decide which columns will be shown by selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu (see List Functionality, page 10–1). The following window displays:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–9

List Window

ABC

The left column shows you all the parameters that can be displayed in the "Assigned" tab. The right column lists the parameters that are actually shown. 2. Continue as described in step 2 on page 10–3.To add parameters:, page 10–3 Functionality 0

10–10

Positioning of pages by dragging-and-dropping them to the graphic window. Position to the "Page List" tab if you wish to position several pages. This tab shows you all the pages defined in the product part, making a direct check very simple.

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

0

A double click on a row or a single click if the Document Inspector is displayed Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is marked in the Browser window. The Document Inspector displays in the inspectors window so that you can edit the page.

The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Assigned" tab in the list window with a PDF file selected: 0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector, page 9–82 in the inspectors window.

0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

0

"Remove Document from Job" The PDF file is deleted from the job.

0

"Reload Document" The imported PDF file is updated in the job.

0

"Assign Pages" The selected pages are assigned to the job. The pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next blank pages in the job.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Save Table as HTML File..."

10–11

List Window

ABC

You can save the listed information (tables) as a HTML file (for checking purposes). 0

"Print Table..." In the List Functionality, page 10–1, you can print the listed information (tables) to a printer.

The functions just named but without "Remove Document from Job" and "Reload Document" are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Assigned" tab in the list window with a page selected: The following additional function is available: 0

"Delete Page Assignment" Deletes assignment of the selected page(s)/1up(s) in the job. The pages/1ups in the job no longer have any assigned content.

Not assigned The "Not assigned" tab shows you all the pages that were imported to the current job but not yet positioned. The relevant parameters are listed. You can configure which parameters will be shown in the "Not assigned" tab as follows: 1. You can decide which columns will be shown by selecting "Select Columns" in the context-sensitive menu (see List Functionality, page 10–1). The following window displays:

10–12

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

The left column shows you all the parameters that can be displayed in the "Not assigned" tab. The right column lists the parameters that are actually shown. 2. Continue as described in step 2 on page 10–3.To add parameters:, page 10–3 Functionality 0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Positioning of pages by dragging-and-dropping them to the graphic window. Position to the "Page List" tab if you wish to position several pages. This tab shows you all the pages defined in the product part, making a direct check very simple.

10–13

List Window

ABC

0

A double click on a row or a single click if the Document Inspector is displayed Displays that page or 1up in the "Document" tab in the graphic window. The selected page or 1up is marked in the Browser window. The Document Inspector displays in the inspectors window so that you can edit the page.

The following functions are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Not assigned" tab in the list window with a PDF file selected: 0

"Document Inspector" Displays the Document Inspector, page 9–82 in the inspectors window.

0

"Preview" Generates previews of the pages. You can set general view properties. See Defaults for Working Mode, page 4–5 for details.

0

"Open with Acrobat" The whole PDF file is opened and displayed with Acrobat. Refer also to Select External Executables, page 4–7.

0

"Remove Document from Job" The PDF file is deleted from the job.

0

"Reload Document" The imported PDF file is updated in the job.

0

"Assign Pages" The selected pages are assigned to the job. The pages/1ups are assigned automatically to the next blank pages in the job.

10–14

Edition February 2006

List Window

ABC

0

"Save Table as HTML File..." You can save the listed information (tables) as a HTML file (for checking purposes).

0

"Print Table..." In the List Functionality, page 10–1, you can print the listed information (tables) to a printer.

The functions just named but without "Remove Document from Job" and "Reload Document" are available when you display the context-sensitive menu in the "Not assigned" tab in the list window with a page selected.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

10–15

Editors

ABC 11 Editors

General 0

The following parameters are common to all editors: 0

"Group": Group name in the tree structure in the Browser window. See To create a group folder, page 7–5 for details.

0

"Name": Name of the object. This appears in the relevant group in the Browser window and in the caption bar of the editor.

0

"Save": Saves the object. You cannot edit, i.e. overwrite, default objects. You also cannot create new default objects with them. Resources that cannot be changed are locked. This is indicated by a lock.

0

0

"Close": The editor closes. The object is not saved.

0

"Reset": The object version last saved is loaded.

"New" button: Some dialogs for loading "Resources" and "Machines" have a "New" button. The editor matches the object that you are about to load. It allows you to create a new resource or machine without having to quit the current dialog. Example: In the Plate Template Editor > "Plate Template" tab, click the folder button to the right of the "Press" text box. The "Choose Press" dialog dis-

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–1

Editors

ABC

plays. Click the "New" button (at bottom left in window) to go to the press editor you want. You can also decide to set up a new press if you wish.

Plate Template Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a plate template that is saved as a resource in "Plate Templates". Graphic Area Graphic display of the plate template: 0

Plate: dark gray

0

Paper: light gray

0

Sujet (area of paper with print data): purple

0

Imaging window: within blue-and-white frame

0

Baseline: blue line

0

Gripper margin: reddish-brown strip below baseline

Display and input: 0

The "X", "Y" coordinates show the current cursor position.

0

"W", "H": The width and height of a frame you create are shown in these boxes.

To select an object. To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass.

11–2

Edition February 2006

ABC

Editors

Hand tool: Moves selected objects. Click an object with this tool to move the object. To set a measuring point and create a frame: This tool lets you set measuring points or create a frame and read off the values in the read-only boxes on the left. As an alternative to the tool: "command key + Shift key" User-defined dimensions: This tool lets you measure from one defined edge (e.g. paper edge, page edge, etc.) to another defined edge. Example: You are going to measure the distance between the edge of a page and that of the paper. 0 Move the mouse pointer to the page edge. 0 The starting edge is shown as a red bar. 0 Hold down the mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to the paper edge. 0 The target edge is shown as a green bar. 0 Let go of the mouse button. 0 The distance from the page edge to the paper edge is shown along a line between the red and green bar. Note: Dimensioning in the following tool (View Properties) must be enabled. 0 Use the shortcut "Alt + click" to delete dimensioning.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–3

Editors

ABC

View Properties: You can use this tool to change the graphic display. Working with layers, see View Properties and Enable/ Disable Layers, page 8–12. 0 "View" tab: For showing or hiding the various objects. 0 "Dimensions" tab: For showing or hiding the dimensions of various objects. 0 "Grid" tab: For showing or hiding a grid and setting its color. 0

List box with zoom factors.

Plate Template Tab When you go to define a plate template, you should load a press that is already defined (see the section Sheetfed Press Editor, page 11–64 and section Web Press Editor, page 11–64). You can view it in "Machines" in the Browser window. Plate Dimension 0

" Press": Click the folder button beside this box to load a press. You set up this press beforehand in the "Machines" tab in the "Jobs & Resources > Resources & Machines" menu.

0

"Width", "Height": The height and width are already defined as parameters and are automatically set when you load the press. You can, however, change the parameters in this box.

Paper Definitions To be able to follow the definitions below, bear in mind the press parameters that you defined in "Machines".

11–4

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Some of the following parameters are computed from the press data. 0

"Max. paper width": Max. paper width = plate width - (2 x print margin)

0

"Max. paper height": In the definition of the max. paper height, it is assumed that the end of paper is the same as the end of print (related to the plate start). The following is applicable for the max. paper height: Max. paper height = end of paper - baseline Baseline is calculated as follows: Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin When calculating the end of paper, remember that the "Tail Edge of Print" value refers to the end of the plate. This means that the end of paper is calculated as follows: End of paper = Plate height - tail edge of print To summarize, the max. paper height is defined as follows: Max. paper height = Plate height - tail edge of print - lead edge of print + gripper margin

0

"Baseline": Baseline = Lead edge of print - gripper margin

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

"Gripper Margin": This value is already defined as a machine parameter and is automatically set when you load the press. You can, however, change it in this box.

0

"X Offset": Horizontal offset of the paper in relation to the plate.

11–5

Editors

ABC

Output 0

"Output parameters": You already defined the output parameter set beforehand as a resource. These output parameters are used in this box. For the job output, you must make sure manually that the same output parameter set is used.

Imaging Window 0

"Width", "Height": Size of the imaging window "Width": Slow scan direction "Height": Fast scan direction

0

2

The origin of the imaging window ("X", "Y") is at the bottom left. Note: If you want your output to be centered, make sure that the imaging window is centered with regard to the plate template. Set the position of the imaging window with X, Y values.

Marks Tab The "Marks List" contains all the marks that you positioned on the plate template. The list is sorted by "Sujet", "Paper", "Plate". Within one group, the mark last positioned is at the top. This lets you display the "Marks" resource where you can select a mark. The mark is positioned at the bottom left of the graphic (origin) and is added to the "Marks List". Replace the selected mark by another one. The selected mark is overwritten. Delete selected mark.

11–6

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

0

"Group/Name": This displays the resources group and the name of the selected mark.

0

"Color": Separations which will have the mark.

0

"Reference Point": Reference point on which the mark will be placed. The reference points appear when you move a mark in the graphic, holding down the mouse button. Depending on what is set as the parent, the reference points for paper, plate or sujet are shown.

0

"Position X, Y": Mark coordinate relative to the selected reference point.

0

"Scale": Scaling factor of the mark (minimum = 10%, maximum = 500%).

0

"Orientation" of the mark.

0

"Parent": A mark is assigned to the paper, plate or sujet. If you change the size or position of one of these objects, the position of the assigned mark is matched automatically.

Expert Mode: 0

"Foreground": The mark is either on top of (= foreground) or below the page content.

0

You can assign each mark to a certain surface (front, back) or to "All Surfaces" using the "Surface" list box. In the previous versions, you could only do this afterwards in the inspectors.

0

"Width", "Height": Mark size

0

"Clippath": This parameter lets you define the part of a mark that can be cut out. You can do this in one of the following two ways: a) You define the margins in "Clippath". When you click a mark with the right mouse button, a yellow

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–7

Editors

ABC

rectangle surrounding the mark appears. The margins defined refer to this rectangle. 0

"Margin left": A value of "0" corresponds to the left margin of the rectangle surrounding the mark. A value you enter is the distance starting from the left margin and extending into the mark. This part of the mark is cut out when you hit the Tab key or click another text box.

0

"Margin bottom", "Right", "Top": See "Margin left". You can cut the mark accordingly from the bottom, right and top margin.

b) You can draw a bounding box within the mark. This bounding box surrounds the part of the mark that will remain after the other part is cut out. To do this, press the command key + Shift and create the box holding down the mouse button. First let go of the mouse button and then the command + Shift keys. The bounding box must be within the selected mark. The function is only applied when you click this button. You can find other tips in the User's Guide. Marks Resources Tab In this tab, you can drag-and-drop marks in the graphic to the position you want. You will see reference points for paper and sujet if you move an object in the graphic holding down the mouse button. You can find more details in Selected Mark, page 9–60.

11–8

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Notes on Marks 0

The "TilingLine_Horizontal" and "TilingLine_Vertical" marks must have "Paper" as their parent as tiling will not work if they don't.

0

In tiling, the start of imaging can be defined by setting the "TilingLine_Horizontal" and "TilingLine_Vertical" lines: a) The outer tiling line is within the paper: In this case, the plate defines the start of imaging. The tiling line tiles the sheet and the appropriate tile numbers are displayed. b) The outer tiling line is outside the paper or at the start of it: In this case, imaging starts at the position of the tiling line. The sheet is not divided by this tiling line.

0

The "TilingRegister" and "TilingText" marks are set automatically.

Loading the "Plate Templates" Resource to the Job This is where you load the resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

Folding Scheme Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a folding scheme that is saved as a resource in "Schemes". You have a list box at the top right in the "Matrix" group that you can use to create or edit a scheme for web offset. You can choose between sheetfed offset and web offset (up to 8 webs). A list box displays if you have two or more webs, allowing you to switch

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–9

Editors

ABC

between the webs. To start the "Fold Assistant for Web", click the button in "Scheme Generated from Folding Rule". See Fold Assistant for Web, page 11–26 for details. For a three-dimensional view of a folding scheme, see also Folding Sheet Animation, page 12–13. Folding Scheme Data 0

"Folding Scheme Name": Exact name of a fold type listed in Heidelberg's fold type catalog that will be used in this scheme. The folding scheme name is saved for automatic finishing (default at the folding machine). The folding scheme name is generally defined in the standard schemes. It should only be edited if special defaults will be defined at the folding machine.

0

"Comment": This is where you can enter comments about the scheme. They will not be evaluated.

0

"Center Offset": Normally (symmetric binding), the value is "0" (see Center offset below). The system sets implausible values for the center offset back to "0".

Center offset What is center offset? In asymmetric binding with fold-out pages, center offset defines in which fold binding will be. The purpose of center offset is to calculate page numbering and creeping correctly. Creeping is not used on fold-out pages.

11–10

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

When is center offset used? Center offset is used only with products that have the following criteria: 0

The scheme is single-lined.

0

There are fold-out pages. In other words, binding is asymmetric with regard to the folding scheme.

0

The selected binding method is saddle-stitching or mixed binding. Creeping must be calculated correctly.

Example: A book will have the following folding sheet: Folding scheme F04-01_ui_2x1

Pagination and orientation

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–11

Editors

ABC

This is to contain a sheet with one fold-out page. The sheet has the following folding scheme: Folding scheme F06-04_ui_3x1_P (not a standard scheme)

Pagination and orientation

The left leaf can be folded out on this sheet. Binding must be in fold 2. The "Center Offset" parameter defines in which fold binding will be. Calculation of the center offset 1. The reference point for center offset is the theoretical center of the scheme. You determine the theoretical center of the scheme by dividing the number of all the sheet pages (front and back) by two. In our example, the theoretical center of the sheet with the fold-out page is "3". 2. Now count the front and back pages from left to right until you come to the fold where binding will be.

11–12

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

In our example binding is in fold 2. The number of front and back pages until fold 2 is "4". 3. The center offset is the difference between the number of these pages and the theoretical center. In our example, the value is "1" (4-3). The center offset is positive in this case. This means that the fold where binding will be is to the right of the theoretical center. 0

Positive center offset: The fold is to the right of the theoretical center.

0

Negative center offset: The fold is to the left of the theoretical center.

0

"Columns": Number of columns in the scheme

0

"Rows": Number of rows in the scheme

0

List box for printing process (sheetfed or web with the number of webs)

0

"Back by Tumble": The default setting is that the back is created by work-and-turn. You must check this option if you wish to create the back by workand-tumble.

0

"Generate Back": You generated the page numbers and orientation for the front. The page numbers and orientation for the back are generated automatically if you check "Generate Back".

0

"Use Prototype": You have an imposition scheme with many identical 1ups.

Matrix

Customize

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–13

Editors

ABC

0

Front: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the number and orientation of the bottom left 1up that is marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the front.

0

Back: With "Use Prototype", you can copy the number and orientation of the 1up that is marked "(1,1)" to all 1ups on the back. Sheetwise: The prototype is the bottom right 1up. Perfector: The prototype is the top left 1up.

0

"Push Together": This function is used if you wish to exclude positions from pagination in the folding scheme and yet keep numbering consecutive. This is required, for example, when only parts of a web are used in printing (see Push Together below).

Push Together A press with two webs will now be used as an example of how you proceed with "Push Together". The second web width is half the size of the first web. 1. In the "Matrix" group, create a 2x2 scheme and select "Double Web Press". 2. Enter folding rule "X1Y1".

11–14

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

All other settings remain as they are. You then have the following page setup: Web 1 without 'Push Together'

Web 2 without 'Push Together'

3. Web 2 is half as wide as web 1. This means that pages 14, 3, 13 and 4 would not be positioned on paper in the scheme. Set these page numbers to "0".

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–15

Editors

ABC

4. Click "Push Together". The page numbers are now corrected. The correct scheme is now as follows: Web 1 with 'Push Together'

Web 2 with 'Push Together'

Scheme Generated from Folding Rule In principle, page numbering and page orientation always depend on all the other parameters in this group.

11–16

0

"Folding Rule": You can type in the folding rule manually in this box (see the Folding rule, page 11–17 below).

0

Fold Assistant: Start the Folding Assistant by clicking the icon on the right. The Fold Assistant is a

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

graphic tool for creating folding rules (see the Fold Assistant / Folding Sheet Animation, page 11–22 below). 0

"Pagination": 0

"Normal": The pages of the product you want to fold are numbered consecutively like a book. All the pages have the same orientation.

0

"Calendar": The pages of the product you want to fold are numbered consecutively like a book. Every second page has the opposite orientation.

0

"Accordion Fold": This type of pagination only affects single-lined schemes. Viewed from page 1, page numbering is to the right and circular (including the back) and in ascending order. All the pages have the same orientation.

0

"Orientation of Top Page after Folding": Click the middle of the side edge to change the orientation.

0

"Web 1 on Bottom": On most web presses, web 1 is on top. You must click this option if web 1 on your press is on the bottom.

0

"First Page on Back": This is where you set whether page 1 lies at the front or back after folding.

0

"Apply Folding Procedure to Front": Some products require that the back is printed first and then the front. In such cases, the front lies on top after printing. You must then apply the folding rule to the front.

Folding rule The folding rule elements are "X", "x", "Y", "y" and digits after the letter. The "-" sign is used in special cases and is placed at the start of a folding step.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–17

Editors

ABC

The fold lay mark is always at the bottom left. Folding is always from left to right and from bottom to top. 0

X: Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top; the left pages lie on top of the right pages after folding.

0

x: Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on bottom; the left pages lie below the right pages after folding.

0

Y: Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on top; the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages after folding.

0

y: Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bottom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages after folding.

0

Digit: Number of pages up to the fold from left to right or from bottom to top.

0

"-": If there is a "-" sign in the folding rule, all folding steps after the "-" are ignored in finishing. The sheets are not actually folded after the "-". However, the steps after the "-" still run through the folding rule so that the page numbers can be calculated correctly. Refer also to Example for folding rule "X1-Y1", page 11–20 and Example for folding rule "X1X2-x1" for a double gate fold, page 11–21. You cannot create the "-" sign with the Fold Assistant.

11–18

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Example for folding rule "X2x1Y2y1" The standard scheme "F32-08_li_4x4" is used: Folding scheme F32-08_li_4x4

The folding rule in this case is "X2x1Y2y1". 1. X2: Go two pages to the right. You are now at fold 1. Fold your sheet so that the two left pages lie on top of the two right pages. 2. x1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 2. Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie below the right pages. 3. Y2: Go two pages to the top. You are now at fold 3. Fold your sheet so that that the lower pages lie on the upper pages. 4. y1: Go one page up. You are now at fold 4. Fold your sheet so that that the lower pages lie below the upper pages.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–19

Editors

ABC

Example for folding rule "X1-Y1" In this example, we'll use standard scheme "F0807_li_2x2". The folding rule in this case is "X1Y1". Folding scheme F08-07_li_2x2

Change the folding rule to "X1-Y1". Folding is as shown below if you enter this folding rule. What is special about this folding rule is that step Y1 is not done after the "-" sign.

1. X1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 1. Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on the right pages. 2. "-": The "-" sign means that the next step "Y1" is ignored in finishing. 3. Y1: Go one page up. You are now at fold 2. You would now fold your sheet so that the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages.

11–20

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Practical example for "Come & Go" binding: Instead of folding in fold 2, the cutter is used at this point when all the sheets are stacked. The lower stack is packed on the top stack by work-and-tumble. Example for folding rule "X1X2-x1" for a double gate fold The standard scheme "F06-03_ui_3-4x1" is used: Folding scheme F06-03_ui_3-4x1

The folding rule in this case is "X1X2-x1". 1. X1: Go one page to the right. You are now at fold 1. Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on the right pages. 2. X2: Go two pages to the right. You are now at fold 2. Fold your sheet so that that the left pages lie on top of the right pages. 3. "-": The "-" sign means that the next step "x1" is ignored in finishing. 4. x1: Go one page to the right. There is no fold here in a double gate fold. You would now fold your sheet so that the left pages lie below the right pages. In a double gate fold, there is no middle fold. For that reason, step "x1" is ignored in finishing.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–21

Editors

ABC

Fold Assistant / Folding Sheet Animation Start the Fold Assistant by clicking the icon to the right of the "Folding Rule" text box. Depending on your input in "Matrix", you will see a simplified graphic of the scheme. The fold lay mark is at the bottom left. Lower down in the window, you can see a threedimensional animated graphic that simulates folding to you at the same time. Make your window bigger to view both. You can edit in a two-dimensional or threedimensional view as suits you best. The two view options will now be described. Both tools are linked together. Any editing you do in the Fold Assistant is shown at the same time in the fold animation and vice versa. Fold Assistant There are two symbols before every possible fold. They indicate whether folding is up or down. It is also possible to cut the folding sheet along the symmetrical axes into same-sized halves (scissors icon): "X": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top; the left pages lie on top of the right pages after folding. "Y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on top; the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages after folding. "x": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on bottom; the left pages lie below the right pages after folding.

11–22

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

"y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bottom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages after folding. "Y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked on "top"; the upper pages lie on top of the lower pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to the "back"; the upper pages lie below the lower pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "X": Cut in open sheet length and stacked on "top"; the left pages lie on top of the right pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "x": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to the "back"; the left pages lie below the right pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. A part of the light-green scheme disappears after every fold or cut. Each fold or cut is documented as part of the folding rule in the "Folding Rule" text box and the small graphic above it. At the end, you should be left with a dark green box representing the topmost page. 0

"Back One Step": Undoes the last fold.

0

"Reset": Undoes all folds.

0

"Apply": The current folding rule appears in the "Folding Rule" box of the Folding Scheme Editor. The Fold Assistant is exited. Any implausible folding rules are marked red.

0

"Cancel": The Fold Assistant is exited. No folding rule is applied.

You cannot create the "-" sign with the Fold Assistant (see Folding rule, page 11–17).

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–23

Editors

ABC

Fold Animation The fold animation shows you a three-dimensional graphic of the scheme on the folding sheet. Enable the edit mode with a click on the button described below. The following functionalities are implemented:

No function. Rotation of the animation. Click the animated graphic while holding down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer. To zoom up the entire graphic. A "+" appears in the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. Enables the edit mode.

After you enable the edit mode, two symbols appear before every possible fold (green: front, yellow: back). They indicate whether folding is up or down. It is also possible to cut the folding sheet along the symmetrical axes into same-sized halves (red, blue): "X": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on top; the left pages lie on top of the right pages after folding. "Y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on top; the lower pages lie on top of the upper pages after folding.

11–24

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

"x": Fold in open sheet length, buckle plate on bottom; the left pages lie below the right pages after folding. "y": Fold in open sheet width, buckle plate on bottom; the lower pages lie below the upper pages after folding. "Y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked on "top"; the upper pages lie on top of the lower pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "y": Cut in open sheet width and stacked to the "back"; the upper pages lie below the lower pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "X": Cut in open sheet length and stacked on "top"; the left pages lie on top of the right pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. "x": Cut in open sheet length and stacked to the "back"; the left pages lie below the right pages, only applicable on symmetrical axes. The animation shows you how a part of the scheme is folded or cut each time you define a fold or cut and how the sheets are stacked on top or to the back. Each fold or cut is documented as part of the folding rule in the "Folding Rule" text box and the small graphic above it. At the end, you should be left with one box representing the topmost page.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

"Back One Step": Undoes the last fold.

0

"Reset": Undoes all folds.

0

"Apply": The current folding rule appears in the "Folding Rule" box of the Folding Scheme Editor. The fold animation is exited. Any implausible folding rules are marked red.

11–25

Editors

ABC

0

"Cancel": The fold animation is exited. No folding rule is applied.

You cannot create the "-" sign with the fold animation (see Folding rule, page 11–17). Fold Assistant for Web You start the Fold Assistant for Web after you set web in the list box in "Matrix" and by clicking the button to the right of the "Folding Rule" text box After you set web in "Matrix", you will see a simplified graphic of the scheme with the number of possible ribbons (web width), number of webs and number of possible vertical rows. In the Fold Assistant, you define how the webs will be cut and how the resulting ribbons will be positioned at the former. We will now describe the tools in this window: Cut: The web is cut into ribbons in running direction of the web. The ribbons are yellow and light-yellow.

Stack: The webs with the various ribbons are placed in the former with the "Stack" button.

11–26

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Turn: You can turn the ribbons in the former. Ribbons that are turned are green.

Position: This tool lets you reposition the ribbons at the former.

Parts of a web: If you have webs that do not go across the full width of the paper, do not stack ribbons that don't match the web at the former. 0

"Apply": The Fold Assistant displays to define the horizontal and parallel folds. See Fold Assistant / Folding Sheet Animation, page 11–22 for details.

0

"Cancel": The Fold Assistant for Web is exited.

Naming Used in the Standard Schemes The elements of scheme "F06-04_dd_3x1_P" are taken as an example to explain the naming in standard schemes:

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

F06-04

d

d

3x1

P

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(1): Name of the scheme as listed in Heidelberg's fold type catalog.

11–27

Editors

ABC

First digit: Number of pages per plate Second digit after the hyphen: Consecutive number 0

(2): Orientation of the top page after folding: u: upright d: head down l: head to left r: head to right

0

(3): Numbering order i: increment, 1st page is in front after folding d: decrement, 1st page is at back after folding

0

(4): "Number of columns" x "Number of rows"

0

(5): Numbering is for a brochure if a "P" is added to the scheme name. The "Accordion Fold" pagination mode in the Folding Scheme Editor is for brochure numbering.

Double Gate Fold as a Special Case The following scheme names are designed for double gate folds: 0

F06-03_ui_3-4x1

0

F06-03_ud_3-4x1_P

The difference to all other names used for standard schemes is found in the number of columns specified in item (4), see above. In this case, the number of columns is defined as "34". "3" stands for the number of unfolded pages. "4" stands for the number of numbered pages.

11–28

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Loading the "Schemes" Resource to the Job This is where you load the resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Folding Schemes"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Schemes"

Marks Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a mark that is saved as a resource in "Marks". "General" Group 0

"Group Name": Displays the assigned group (folder) of the mark. You cannot edit the group name.

0

“Mark name": Displays the name of the mark. The name appears after the mark is saved to the resources. You can edit the name.

0

"Mark Type": Displays the mark type. List box for setting the type: "Register Mark", "Color Control Mark" or "Scavenger Mark". The mark type you set is saved for finishing.

0

"Hotspot": A scheme or plate template has reference points. These are magnetic alignment spots that help to position the marks correctly. The hotspot of the mark snaps accurately into position above this spot. You must define the correct position of the hotspot within the mark. If you enabled "Grid" in the graphic area, you will see that the grid has a violet hotspot.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Fixed position for front and back": The mark position in relation to the origin is generally different for front and back. For work-and-turn, for exam-

11–29

Editors

ABC

ple, it is mirrored so that the mark is in the right position for the pages. There are cases where the mark position has to be the same for the front and back. You must set this option in such cases. 0

"Mirror mark on back": The mark content generally will not be mirrored if the mark position is mirrored on the back. You must only set this option if the mark content is to be mirrored on the back.

Graphic Area Tools for Creating Marks To select several graphic objects, hold down the Alt key and click the relevant objects with the mouse. Edit tool: Edits a selected object. Click a handle with this tool to change the object. Hand tool: Moves selected objects. Click an object with this tool to move the object. Creates a circle or ellipse. Creates a straight line. Creates a square or rectangle. Colors the object below the mouse pointer black. Colors the object below the mouse pointer white.

11–30

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Inserts text. Deletes selected objects. Copies selected objects. Centers selected objects. Fits canvas to bounding box. The canvas is centered in the bounding box. Brings selected objects to the front: The objects are brought to the front in the order they were selected. Zoom up graphic is set by default. A "+" appears in the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. Text Boxes 0

"Grid": This option lets you display a grid and hotspot (violet circle) as a visual guide. The hotspot always appears at the center of the grid.

0

"Snap lines": Snap lines are seen if you set this option. Snap lines help you position objects. In a defined area, the objects are aligned magnetically to the snap line and remain attached to it. You can change the shape and size of the object at the snap line if you selected it with the edit cursor (e.g. a circle can become an ellipse). You can only change the object position at the snap line if you selected the object with the hand cursor.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–31

Editors

ABC

0

To create snap lines: Click the ruler with the edit tool and drag the snap line to the graphic holding down the mouse button.

0

To delete snap lines: Click the snap line with the edit tool and drag it out of the graphic holding down the mouse button.

0

To position snap lines: Click the snap line with the edit tool and position it holding down the mouse button.

0

"Line weight": This is where you define the line weight for circles, rectangles and lines.

0

List box with all the objects that are found in the graphic. You can select "All" or single objects in this box. The objects are shown in the order they were created.

Properties dialog for a selected graphic object. You can define properties such as size, position, line weight, fill color, etc. and paste placeholders in this dialog. The dialog can vary depending on the object you selected (graphic, text). The properties dialog for a canvas opens if an object is not selected. You can set the size and color of the canvas and the grid size in this dialog. "Undo" function: Undoes the last action. "Redo" function: Redoes the last action deleted with "Undo".

Other text boxes are needed for creating text marks. You can find a description of these boxes in the next section Text Mark Editor, page 11–33.

11–32

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Text Mark Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a pure text mark that is saved as a resource in "Marks". "General" Group 0

"Mark name": Displays the name of the mark. The name appears after the mark is saved to the resources. You can edit the name.

0

"Group Name": Displays the assigned group (folder) of the mark. You cannot edit the group name.

0

"Font": Details about the font type and size, ink coverage and font running direction (horizontal, vertical).

0

"Text": Selection of a placeholder that you can paste with "Insert placeholder".

Creating a Text Mark To create "internal text marks", see Creating Internal Marks, page 8–14 1. You can open the Text Mark Editor to create a new mark in two different ways: 0

Main menu: "File > Create Resource > New Mark > Text Mark Editor"

0

Main menu: "Jobs & Resources > Marks", > rightclick group name > "New Mark > Text Mark Editor"

(2.) "General": Give your new text mark a name. The group name shows you the folder to which the text mark will be saved. (3.) "Font": This is where you can select the "Font Type" and "Font Size" of the text mark.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–33

Editors

ABC

(4.) "Running Direction": Define the direction of your text. In the list box, you can set that the text will run vertically (from top to bottom) or horizontally (from left to right). (5.) "Ink Coverage": This is where you can select the grayscale of the text mark. 0

Click "Apply" to view your inputs in the graphic without closing the properties dialog.

0

You can also create text marks directly in the "Marks Editor" dialog. Use the list boxes for font, font size and placeholders and the "Insert text mark" button for this. Proceed as described for the properties dialog for text marks (see above).

6. Enter your mark text in "Text". You can mix your edited mark text with placeholders as you want (see next two steps). 7. There is a list box above the text box with all the placeholders such as "Job Number", "Output Date", etc. For example, select "Job Number" and confirm your selection by clicking the "Insert placeholder" button on the right. As you progress in your work, the placeholders are replaced by their respective contents (see the section Placeholders for Text Marks, page 11–34). Placeholders for Text Marks There are three groups of placeholders that are separated by horizontal lines in the list box (for list box, see the section Creating a Text Mark, page 11–33, step 10):

11–34

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

First group: Placeholders that are replaced by Prinect Printready in a workflow with Prinect Printready, even if Prinect Signa Station is started from Printready. These placeholders are replaced by Prinect Signa Station in a workflow without Prinect Printready when Prinect Signa Station is running as a stand-alone workstation.

Reference required by placeholders in Prinect Signa Stationso that they can be replaced.

Order name

$[jobname]

Press Sheet

Order number

$[jobid]

Press Sheet

Output date

$[Date]

Press Sheet

Output time

$[Time]

Press Sheet

Job Notes

$[OutputComment]

Press Sheet

Customer

$[customername]

Press Sheet

Customer ID

$[customerid]

Press Sheet

Product Part

$[ProductName]

Press Sheet

Sheet

$[Sheet]

Press Sheet

Separation

$[color]

Press Sheet

Layout Name

$[ImpPlanName]

Folding Sheet

Layout bleed size (width)

$[ImpBleedSizeX]

Page

Layout bleed size (height)

$[ImpBleedSizeY]

Page

Layer name

$[LayerName]

Press Sheet

Trim box width

$[PageTrimSizeX]

Page

Trim box height

$[PageTrimSizeY]

Page

Trim box offset horizontal

$[PageOffsetX]

Page

Trim box offset vertical

$[PageOffsetY]

Page

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–35

Editors

ABC

First group: Placeholders that are replaced by Prinect Printready in a workflow with Prinect Printready, even if Prinect Signa Station is started from Printready. These placeholders are replaced by Prinect Signa Station in a workflow without Prinect Printready when Prinect Signa Station is running as a stand-alone workstation.

Reference required by placeholders in Prinect Signa Stationso that they can be replaced.

Page Name

$[PageName]

Page

Layout Page Number

$[PagePositionName] Page

Page List

$[PageSetName]

Page

Page scale (width)

$[PageScaleX]

Page

Page scale (height)

$[PageScaleY]

Page

Page rotation (0, 90, 180, 270 degrees)

$[PO]

Page

Second group: Placeholders that are always replaced by Prinect Signa Station in a workflow, even if the job/product part is edited with Prinect Printready.

Reference required by placeholders in Prinect Signa Stationso that they can be replaced.

Front and Back / Top and Bottom

$[SurfaceName]

Press Sheet

Sheet number

$[Sheetno]

Press Sheet

Folding sheet number

$[Sheetregionno]

Folding Sheet

Collating Number

$[SheetregionGroupno]

Folding Sheet

Collating Group Number

$[CollatingGroupno]

Folding Sheet

Station Number

$[StationNumber]

Page

Application

$[Application]

Press Sheet

11–36

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Second group: Placeholders that are always replaced by Prinect Signa Station in a workflow, even if the job/product part is edited with Prinect Printready.

Reference required by placeholders in Prinect Signa Stationso that they can be replaced.

Part number

$[Tile]

Press Sheet

Binding Methods

$[Binding]

Press Sheet

Paper Size

$[PaperFormat]

Press Sheet

Number of Pages

$[PageCount]

Press Sheet

Page Document

$[PageDocumentName]

Press Sheet

Page Number in Document

$[PageNumberInDocument]

Press Sheet

OPP/OPC

$[OPP]

Press Sheet

Web Name

$[WebName]

Press Sheet

Folding Scheme Name

$[SchemeName]

Folding Sheet

Printing Type

$[PrintType]

Folding Sheet

Placing mode

$[PrintWorkstyle]

Press Sheet

Created by

$[Creator]

Press Sheet

Press Name

$[PressName]

Press Sheet

Folding Rule (HDM)

$[StahlFold]

Press Sheet

Replacers

$[FreeReplacerXY]

Press Sheet

Third group: Placeholders that are not replaced by Prinect Signa Station but by Prinect Printready:

Signature number

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

$[Signature]

Are not replaced. Should have reference to press sheet in Prinect Signa Station. Press Sheet

11–37

Editors

ABC

Third group: Placeholders that are not replaced by Prinect Signa Station but by Prinect Printready:

Are not replaced. Should have reference to press sheet in Prinect Signa Station.

Screen system

$[ScreenSystem]

Press Sheet

Dot shape

$[DotShape]

Press Sheet

Screen Frequency

$[ScreenRuling]

Press Sheet

Resolution (X Direction)

$[ResolutionX]

Press Sheet

Resolution (Y Direction)

$[ResolutionY]

Press Sheet

Name of Sequence Template

$[SequenceTemplateName]

Press Sheet

Calibration

$[ProcessCalCurve]

Press Sheet

Calibration Group

$[ProcessCalGroup]

Press Sheet

Linearization group

$[LinearizationGroup]

Press Sheet

Linearization curve

$[LinearizationCurve]

Press Sheet

ICC press profile

$[ICCPressProfile]

Press Sheet

ICC proofer profile

$[ICCProoferProfile]

Press Sheet

Customer Approval Com- $[CustomerApprovalment Comment]

Press Sheet

Proof ID

$[ProofID]

Press Sheet

Plate ID

$[PlateID]

Press Sheet

Sheet ID

$[SheetID]

Press Sheet

Source Job ID

$[PageSourceJobID]

Press Sheet

Surface Comment

$[SurfaceComment]

Press Sheet

Submit Comment

$[SubmitComment]

Press Sheet

11–38

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job The marks are also loaded indirectly with the "Plate Templates" resource. On the plate template, the marks set refer to the plate, paper or sujet. This is where you load the "Marks" resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Binding Methods" > "Automatic Placement of Print Control Marks" The cut marks and folding sheet labels that are set relate to the pages, and the folding and collating marks to the folding sheet. The marks are selected in the preferences.

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Binding"

0

Folding Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Page Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Direct assignment by dragging and dropping the resource from the "Marks Resources" tab of the inspectors named above.

Ink Pickup Bar Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit an ink pickup bar that is saved as a resource in "Marks". "General" Group See the "General" Group, page 11–29 in the "Marks Editor" section.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–39

Editors

ABC

Graphic Area The graphic shows the defined ink pickup bar. 0

"+" magnifying glass: Zoom up graphic display

0

"-" magnifying glass: Zoom down graphic display

0

"Width", "Height": Size of a color element in the ink pickup bar. The height of internal marks is set by default and cannot be changed. See also page 8–14. The height of each color is computed from the overall height divided by the number of colors.

0

"Grayscale": The grayscale is the equivalent of the ink coverage. It refers to the whole ink pickup bar.

0

"Choose Color Layer": This is where you can select the colors in the ink pickup bar. For multiple selection, see General Functions, page 2–18.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job The marks are also loaded indirectly with the "Plate Templates" resource. On the plate template, the marks set refer to the plate, paper or sujet. This is where you load the "Marks" resource to the job:

11–40

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

0

Folding Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Page Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Direct assignment by dragging and dropping the resource from the "Marks Resources" tab of the inspectors named above.

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Color Control Bar Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a color control bar that is saved as a resource in "Marks". The color control bar always shows at least one sequence of all the colors. You can vary the number of colors and the elements per color for the ink coverages. The graphic below is an example of a bar with four colors, each with three elements. The elements have a black frame and are labeled. Example: Color control bar

"General" Group See the "General" Group, page 11–29 in the "Marks Editor" section. Graphic Area

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

"+" magnifying glass: Zoom up graphic display

0

"-" magnifying glass: Zoom down graphic display

0

"Suppress Description": Show, hide labeling of the elements (color code and ink coverage).

0

"Elements without Frame": Show, hide the black frame around an element.

0

"Width": Overall width of the color control bar. If necessary, the value is rounded off so that only integral multiple sequences are produced.

11–41

Editors

ABC

0

"Number of Elements": Number of elements per color with respective ink coverage values.

0

"Element Width":

0

"Element Height":

0

"Choose Color Layer": The ink coverage is shown for every element of a color. The values of the single elements are identical for all colors.

0

Table with "ink coverage": This table lets you define the ink coverage that will be shown for each element.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job The marks are also loaded indirectly with the "Plate Templates" resource. On the plate template, the marks set refer to the plate, paper or sujet. This is where you load the "Marks" resource to the job:

11–42

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

0

Folding Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Page Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Direct assignment by dragging and dropping the resource from the "Marks Resources" tab of the inspectors named above.

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Color Control Bar Special Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a custom color control bar that is saved as a resource in "Marks". The following items are different in the "Special Color Control Bar": 0

You can vary the number and order of the color elements of a sequence as desired.

0

You can define an ink coverage value for each color element in a sequence.

0

You can define a grayscale. The ink coverage values of the single CMYK separations can be set for the grayscale.

Example: Special color control bar

"General" Group See the "General" Group, page 11–29 in the "Marks Editor" section. Graphic Area

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

"+" magnifying glass: Zoom up graphic display

0

"-" magnifying glass: Zoom down graphic display

0

"Suppress Description": Show, hide labeling of the elements (color code and ink coverage).

0

"Elements without Frame": Show, hide the black frame around an element.

11–43

Editors

ABC

0

"Width": Overall width of the color control bar. If necessary, the value is rounded off so that only integral multiple sequences are produced.

0

"Number of Elements": Number of elements (colors) per sequence with respective ink coverage values. The colors appear at the bottom of the table when this number is defined.

0

"Element Width", "Element Height": The color control bar is displayed when the element size is defined.

0

Table with ink coverage values: "Number of Elements" must be defined in order for the colors to be displayed. The following display is the default setting: The first four items are the standard colors CMYK. Spot colors follow as of the fifth item. You can change the order and number of colors as desired. A list box with all the colors you can select displays when you click a color item with the left mouse button. You can set any ink coverage value for each color element in "D". You will also see the item "CMYK" in the colors list box. This item symbolizes the grayscale. You can edit the "D-C", "D-M", "D-Y" and "D-K" boxes for the grayscale. These are the ink coverage values of the single CMYK separations.

Loading the "Marks" Resource to the Job The marks are also loaded indirectly with the "Plate Templates" resource. On the plate template, the marks set refer to the plate, paper or sujet. This is where you load the "Marks" resource to the job:

11–44

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

0

Folding Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Page Inspector > "Marks" / "Marks Resources"

0

Direct assignment by dragging and dropping the resource from the "Marks Resources" tab of the inspectors named above.

Marks Import Editor Use this editor if you wish to import different types of marks and save them as a resource in "Marks". Acrobat Distiller starts when you import a PostScript mark and the mark is converted to a PDF mark. You can start the Marks Import Editor at the following points: 0

In the main menu: "File > Create Resource > New Mark > Marks Import"

0

In the main menu: "Jobs & Resources > Marks" > in the context-sensitive menu > "New Mark > Marks Import..."

"General" Group See the "General" Group, page 11–29 in the "Marks Editor" section.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–45

Editors

ABC

Graphic Area 1. Click "Source" in the "Marks Import Editor". 2. In the Open window, select the mark you wish to import and click "Open". Acrobat Distiller starts and the mark is converted to a PDF mark. A graphic display of the mark appears in the Marks Import Editor. 3. Click "Save" in the Marks Import Editor. The mark is filed as a resource in the relevant group.

Paper Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a data set that defines a paper. It is saved as a resource in "Papers (Printing Materials)". The paper data are saved for finishing. They don't have any control function. They are only displayed at the press for your information.

11–46

0

"Group":

0

"Name":

0

“Mark Name"

0

"Grammage": Paper weight in g/m²:

0

"Volume": Paper volume (density) in cm³/g

0

"Thickness"

0

"ISO Paper Grade"

0

"Width"

0

"Height"

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Loading the "Papers (Printing Materials)" Resource to the Job This is where you load the "Papers" resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates" > "Paper Definition for Production"

Format Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a data set that defines a paper format (page size, page-related extra space, trim). This is saved in the "Page and Paper Sizes" resource. Loading the "Page and Paper Sizes" Resource to the Job This is where you load the "Page and Paper Sizes" resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Master Pages"

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

This is where you can define the page and paper sizes independently of the resource:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

Extra space: "Product Part Inspector > Master Pages"

0

Extra space: "Folding Sheet Inspector > Attributes"

0

Bleed: "Product Part Inspector > Master Pages"

11–47

Editors

ABC

Plate Layout Editor Use this editor if you wish to define the position of folding sheets on a press sheet (plate) to suit your needs. See the Graphic, page 9–52 to learn how this function works.

Customer Data Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a new customer data set that is saved as a resource in "Customer Data". Loading the "Customer Data" Resource to the Job This is where you load the "Customer Data" resource to the job: 0

Job Assistant > "Job Data"

0

Job Inspector > "Administrative Data"

Output Parameter Set Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a new set of output parameters that is saved as a resource in "Output Parameter Sets". "General" Tab

11–48

0

"Name": Displays the group folder name and the name of the output parameter set that you can edit.

0

"Imagesetter data set": This is where you select a filmsetter or platesetter in "Filmsetters" or "Platesetters" in the Browser window. To do this, click

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

the folder button on the right. All installed filmsetters or platesetters will then be shown. The name in the "Data set" box comprises a) the group folder name of the imagesetter resource and b) the name of the imagesetter. 0

"Material": You cannot edit the material but only select it from the list box. The "Width" and "Height" show the size of the imaging window. "Width": Slow scan direction "Height": Fast scan direction You can only change the imaging window of the materials in "Resources & Machines" in "Machines".

0

"Workflow": You select the workflow in the list box in "Device". Then only the outputs possible in combination with the device are shown in the list box in "Variant". Possible combinations:

Output (Variant) PDF Device (Workflow)

JobTicket

PostScript

JDF

Delta Lists

-

DeltaRIP

X

-

DeltaTech 7 and higher

-

X

MetaDimension

X

X

X

-

-

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–49

Editors

ABC

Output (Variant) PDF

JobTicket

PostScript

JDF

Delta Lists

Printready 3

-

-

-

X

-

Prinergy 2.1

-

X

-

-

-

Apogee

-

X

-

X

-

NexPress

-

X

-

-

-

OEM device

X

-

Level 3 and Level 2

X

-

0

"Output folder for PDF, JDF, JT, Delta Documents...": Click the folder button to the right and select the output folder for your output data in the Browser window.

0

"All in one job": All the press sheets are output in one job.

Options Tab Output

0

0

Advantage: High processing speed.

0

Disadvantage: If the output in large complex jobs is faulty, the entire job must be output again after the error is eliminated.

"One job per press sheet or web": One job per front and back printing or per web is output. 0

11–50

Advantage: If the output in large complex jobs is faulty, only a part of the job must be output

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

again after the error is eliminated. This saves you time and material. 0

"One job per surface": A job is created for every front and every back. 0

Advantage: If the output in large complex jobs is faulty, only a small part of the job must be output again after the error is eliminated. This saves you time and material.

0

Disadvantage: The capacity of your output device is not always used optimally.

0

"Print press sheets in reverse order": Output starts with the last press sheet.

0

"Automatic": The press sheets are rotated automatically by 90° if they do not fit the output material.

0

"Portrait": The sheets are output in portrait format.

0

"Landscape": The sheets are output in landscape format.

0

"Mirror horizontal" / "Mirror vertical" You can mirror the sheet horizontally and/or vertically.

0

"Proof color": With this option, you decide whether the "proof color" will also be output or not. If this option is enabled, the outlines of the 1ups and the sheet are shown during the output.

0

"Separated Output (only PostScript workflow; result depends on RIP)": Composite data can be output as separated data.

Orientation

Visual Effects

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–51

Editors

ABC

Scaling You can scale the sheet up or down in percent (minimum=1%, maximum=200%) in x direction (horizontal) and y direction (vertical) for your output. The X and Y values must be the same in tiled sheets. OPP and OPC parameter sets These parameter sets allow you to set RIP parameters such as screening or resolution. Meta Dimension: You can also control process calibration by selecting an appropriate parameter set. Only for following workflows: 0

OPP: MetaDimension workflow

0

OPC: Delta Tech workflow

Process calibration Only for the workflow: 0

Delta Tech: This applies to Delta Technology as of versions 7.x. The relevant calibration files have the extension ".cpf". The cpf files are generated with the Calibration Manager. Delta Technology has a database with the calibration data (transfer curves). The cpf files only contain a reference to the correct calibration data and not the data itself. Settings in the cpf file make sure that the calibration data in the database are assigned to the colors in the job. For that reason, you do not assign colors at the Prinect Signa Station. In other words, the cpf file is assigned to the output.

11–52

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Where is calibration possible? 0

Job: The calibration file is assigned to the job at the Prinect Signa Station. This setting has priority over the setting at Delta Tech (see below).

0

Queue: The calibration file is assigned to a queue at Delta Technology. This setting is subordinate to the setting at the Prinect Signa Station (see above).

More details about calibration can be found in the manual "Calibration Manager - User's Guide". Imaging Size Imagesetter Imaging Window The imaging window you have for output results from the imaging window of the plate template. Paper The imaging window you have for output results from the paper dimensions. Tiling Tiled sheets will be output. The imaging window results from the number of tiling marks on the paper. 0

"Don't generate tiling marks": You can select to output your tiled sheets without any tiling marks. These are eight registration marks and a text mark that identifies the tile. All these marks are placed automatically in the "Extra space" (see below).

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Extra space": Extra space defines the width of the margin that fully surrounds each tile. This margin is required for the tiling marks that are set auto-

11–53

Editors

ABC

matically ("TilingRegister" and "TilingText" marks). You increase the tile size by defining extra space. You must make sure that the maximum output format for the imagesetter is not exceeded when you do this. Alternative Plate Template You can select a different plate template for output. The imaging window of the alternative plate template is used, and all the marks of the original plate template are replaced by those of the alternative plate template. The changes only affect output and not the job itself. This makes it easy for you to change the target device you want for output. The imaging window you have for output results from the imaging window of the new plate template you selected. Back Offset In the "Horizontal" and "Vertical" boxes, you can enter the values by which the press sheet for the back will be moved in relation to the center. For example, this lets you offset tolerances in machines that print front and back at the same time. You can check the result in the "Print Job..." dialog in the "View" function.

11–54

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Punches Tab 0

"Mode": This is where you can select whether the punch settings will apply to the entire press sheet or only to single tiles of the sheet.

Tiles You can edit this section if you opted for the "Tiling" mode. 0

In the list box, select the tile that is to have punch settings.

0

"Rotated": The selected tile is output rotated by 180° if "Rotated" is enabled. Rotation causes the tile to be punched on the opposite side. Make sure that you rotate the correct parts if your output is mirrored.

Punch format The data in this group defines the imaging starting point within the max. imaging area. You must make sure that the tiles of a sheet do not lie outside the maximum imaging area. 0

"Reference punch": The reference punch is used as a reference point for defining the imaging starting point. The center of the punch hole is the zero point for calculating the imaging start. Select the punch in the list box that will be the reference punch. The reference punch selected is shown in the graphic with a frame around it.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Fast Scan Offset", "Slow Scan Offset": The offset values in fast scan and slow scan direction are the distance between the reference punch and the imaging start.

11–55

Editors

ABC

The center of the reference punch hole is the zero point for calculating the imaging start. Offset values counter to scan direction are negative, offset values in scan direction are positive. The reference point on the sheet is the lower left corner of the sheet (for a non-centered output). This means that the sheet is positioned with the lower left corner on the calculated imaging start. Calculation of the imaging start with a non-centered output

0

"Centered output": During output, the sheet is centered to the reference point if this option is enabled. In this case as well, offset values affect fast scan and slow scan direction. In a centered output, the

11–56

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

reference point on the sheet is the middle of the sheet edge concerned. Calculation of the imaging start with a centered output

Finishing Tab Output folder for PPF files You can generate additional PPF files. These files only contain PPF files that were generated by the Prinect Signa Station. This can be helpful if you only need cutting data, for example, and not any data about ink zone control. In this case, the PPF file is much smaller. There is the "Cip" folder that is created automatically for these PPF files.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–57

Editors

ABC

The PPF files are generated as follows, depending on your output mode: See "Output Parameter Set Editor > Options > Output": 0

"All in one job" and "One job per press sheet or web": A PPF file will be generated per press sheet or per web.

0

"One job per surface": A PPF file will be generated per surface.

Saddlestitcher Select the shape and number of staples for saddlestitching in these two list boxes. Workflow The system has to match certain job parameters for DataControl and PECOM in the background: 0

"Undefined": All the parameter defaults are kept.

0

"with DataControl": In this case, the sheet name must have a certain syntax that DataControl can interpret. If you are working with DataControl, you must check this option so that the Prinect Signa Station automatically generates the sheet name with this syntax.

0

"with PECOM": In this case, the job name must have a certain syntax that PECOM products can interpret. If you are working with PECOM products, you must check this option so that Prinect Signa Station automatically generates the job name with this syntax.

11–58

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Loading the "Output Parameter Sets" Resource to the Job This is where you load the "Output Parameter Sets" resource to the job: 0

The job output dialog displays for output of your job ("File > Print job"). You assign the output parameter set to your job in this dialog.

The output parameter set can be defined in the "Plate Templates" resource and you can load it through this resource: 0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

User Data Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit users of the following user groups, "PrePress Administrators", "PrePress Powerusers" and "PrePress Users", and save them as resources in these groups. See chapter 15 in the User's Guide for a description of the permissions of each user group and general handling.

HTML Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit HTML pages (for example, "ReportHeader.html") that are saved as a resource in "Report Headers". This makes it easy for you to edit and create HTML files. The following tabs are available for editing and viewing the HTML file: 0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"View": Is the editing and view section of the editor. If you

11–59

Editors

ABC

add the HTML file to an output from Prinect Signa Station, what you see is identical to this view. 0

"Source Text": Displays the HTML source code. In addition, you can type in special HTML functions that are not available in the toolbar or as functions in the "View" tab.

Graphic Area Tools for the HTML Editor You will find the following tools in the "View" tab for creating or editing a HTML file: Opens an existing HTML file. Highlights selected text in "bold" type. Highlights selected text in "italics". Underlines selected text. Crosses out selected text. Superscripts selected text. Subscripts selected text. Aligns selected text to left.

11–60

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

Aligns selected text to center. Aligns selected text to right. Center justification of selected text. Shows selected rows of text as a list. Shows selected rows of text as a numbered list. Selected text becomes a hyperlink (e.g.: www.heidelberg.com). A table made up of two columns and two rows (standard) is inserted at the cursor position. You can modify this standard table. See last button. A column is added to a table. A column is deleted from a table. A row is added to a table. A row is deleted from a table. Properties dialog: Lets you define the color of the page background and set a table as the default.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

11–61

Editors

ABC

Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors Use these editors if you wish to create/edit a parameter set for filmsetters/platesetters that is saved as a "machine" in "Filmsetters" / "Platesetters". 0

"Mode for Imagesetter Definition": You should use the machine data of an IPR/Query file. All subsequent boxes are then set automatically. You will find the "Ipr_Qry" folder that is created automatically for these machine data in "Preferences > Paths > Workspace". Select the "Manual" mode only if there is no query file. In some RIP configurations, the IPR/Qry file may supply inconsistent values for "Nominal Size", "Imaging Window" and "X/Y Offset". You must then correct the values manually.

0

"IPR/Qry File": All query files are saved in the "Ipr_Qry" folder. A query file must be located in this folder if you want the RIP to generate it. Click the folder button on the right to browse to the "Ipr_Qry" folder.

0

"Imagesetter and RIP Type": Imagesetter and RIP name. They don't have any control function.

0

"Material": Name of the output material. The choice of material influences the "Nominal Size and "Imaging Window" settings. If the material name is taken from an IPR/Qry file, it affects work down the line (material selection at the RIP, calibration). Material name "dummymat@-1" in the "Manual" mode doesn't affect your workflow.

11–62

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

0

"Nominal Size": Size of the output material. "Width": Slow scan direction "Height": Fast scan direction

0

0

"Imaging Window": 0

"Width" and "Height" of the imagesetter's maximum imaging area.

0

"X/Y Offset": Horizontal or vertical offset of the maximum imaging window in relation to the output material. The X, Y origin is at the bottom left.

"Punches": Displays the number of punch dies per head, foot, left and right side.

Loading the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" to the Job The filmsetter or platesetter is defined in the output parameter set and is loaded with the "Output Parameter Set" resource. 0

The job output dialog displays for output of your job ("File > Print job"). You assign the output parameter set to your job in this dialog.

The output parameter set can be defined in the "Plate Templates" resource and you can load it through this resource. In this way, the "Filmsetter / Platesetter" is loaded indirectly to the job:

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

11–63

Editors

ABC

Sheetfed Press Editor Use this editor if you wish to create/edit a parameter set for sheetfed presses that is saved as a "machine" in "Sheetfed Presses". 0

"Ink Zone": "Number" and "Width" of the ink zones.

0

"Plate Size": "Width" and "Height" of the printing plate.

0

"Printable Area": The dimensions for "Lead Edge of Print", "Tail Edge of Print", "Print Margin" and "Gripper Margin" are taken from the respective plate edge. In other words, "Tail Edge of Print" refers to the upper plate edge.

0

"Module": Set the "Perfecting" option if your press has a perfector. This option affects the data setup for finishing.

Loading the "Sheetfed Press" to the Job The press is defined when you are defining the plate template and the default machine data are loaded. This means that the press is assigned indirectly through the plate template: 0

Job Assistant > "Printing Plates"

0

Product Part Inspector > "Plates"

0

"Track": Number and width of the webs

0

"Ink Zone": "Number" and "Width" of the ink zones.

0

"Plate Size": "Width" and "Height" of the printing plate.

Web Press Editor

11–64

Edition February 2006

Editors

ABC

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Printable Area": The dimensions for "Lead Edge of Print", "Tail Edge of Print" and "Print Margin" are taken from the respective plate edge. In other words, "Tail Edge of Print" refers to the upper plate edge.

11–65

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC 12 Menus in Prinect Signa Station

File Menu Open ... You can open one or more job files for editing. You then have all the tools you need to change the job. You can open Prinect Signa Station files as of version 1.0 (*.sdf), converted Signastation version 9 files (*.sg9) and JDF files (*.jdf). New ... Select "File > New" to start the Job Assistant, page 5–1 that will guide you step-by-step through the data you must enter to create a new job. The logical order for creating a job in Prinect Signa Station is: 0

Define the job data (see Administrative Data, page 9–6)

0

Define the product part (see Definition, page 9–14)

0

Define the master pages (see Master Pages, page 9–18)

0

Select the binding method (see Binding, page 9–24)

0

Define the plate (see Plates, page 9–38)

0

Define the folding scheme (see Schemes, page 9–42)

You can find information about each inspector in the chapter Inspectors Window, page 9–1.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–1

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Create Resource You can create new resources that are filed in the Browser window in the relevant folder in "Resources". You cannot file new resources in the Standard folder as this folder is read-only and holds only the shipped resources. To be able to create a new resource, you must first set up your own group folder in the Browser window where you can save your own resources. See , page 7–1 for details. New Plate Template... Creation of a new plate template with the help of the Plate Template Editor, page 11–2. New Scheme... Creation of a new scheme with the help of the Folding Scheme Editor, page 11–9. New Mark Marks Editor Creation of a new mark with the help of the Marks Editor, page 11–29. Text Mark Editor Creation of a new text mark with the help of the Text Mark Editor, page 11–33. Ink pickup bar Creation of a new ink pickup bar with the help of the Ink Pickup Bar Editor, page 11–39.

12–2

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Color control bar Creation of a new color control bar with the help of the Color Control Bar Editor, page 11–41. Special color control bar Creation of a new color control bar with the help of the Color Control Bar Special Editor, page 11–43. Marks Import Import of different types of marks with the help of the Marks Import Editor, page 11–45. New Paper... Creation of paper data with the help of the Paper Editor, page 11–46. New Format... Creation of page sizes with the help of the Format Editor, page 11–47. New Plate Layout... Creation of plate layouts with the help of the Plate Layout Editor, page 11–48. New Customer Data... Creation of customer data with the help of the Customer Data Editor, page 11–48. New Output Parameter Set... Creation of output parameters with the help of the Output Parameter Set Editor, page 11–48.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–3

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

New User Data... Creation of new user data with the help of the User Data Editor, page 11–59. New Report Header... Creation of a new report header with the help of the HTML Editor, page 11–59. Create Machine You can create imagesetters and presses that are filed in the Browser window in the relevant folders in "Machines". You cannot file new machines in the Standard folder as this folder is read-only and holds only the shipped machines. You must create your own machine folder in the Browser window if you wish to create a new machine. See Machines, page 7–14 for details. New Filmsetter Properties Creation of a setup for filmsetters with the help of the Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 11–62. New Platesetter Properties Creation of a setup for platesetters with the help of the Filmsetter and Platesetter Editors, page 11–62. New Sheetfed Press Properties Creation of a setup for sheetfed presses with the help of the Sheetfed Press Editor, page 11–64. New Web Press Properties Creation of a setup for web presses with the help of the Web Press Editor, page 11–64.

12–4

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Import Documents ... The "Documents..." menu item allows you to import PDF files. The PDF files appear in the "Contents" tab in the Browser window. You can now assign these pages to the open job by dragging-and-dropping them. Resource / Machine ... The "Resource / Machine..." menu item allows you to import resources or machine data sets to your own environment. You can select the resources or machine data sets. Prinect Signa Station automatically recognizes the selected resource or machine and suggests a folder in the file structure. The file is then copied to this folder. Paper or Customer Resource by CSV ... Prerequisite: No MDS may be enabled. The "Paper or Customer Resource by CSV..." menu item lets you import paper or customer data from a configuration file (*.ini) and data file (*.txt) of, for example, a paper manufacturer to your own environment. After you select the configuration file, you must then select a matching data file. Resource Type: This shows the resource type you will import ("Customer Data" or "Papers (Printing Materials").

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–5

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Supplier, Version: These will be shown if available in the configuration file. Filter: You can use the filter function to restrict the number of data sets you will import by entering parts of the group name and names of the resources. The data sets are imported automatically to the appropriate resources folders. Note: The configuration file defines the attributes from the data file with which the resource names or group names are created. JDF ... You can import JDF files, for example, from the Standard folder "JDFConnectorOut". After the import, the Job Assistant launches to check the JDF. Preferences ... The "Preferences..." menu item allows you to import existing preferences, for example, from the network environment to your own. Recent Jobs This item shows you the last, inactive jobs. When you select a job, it opens at once and is active for editing. Save Save the changes you made to a currently open job with "File > Save".

12–6

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Save as ... Give your job file a new name when you save it with "File > Save as". The folder in which you opened the job is suggested as the file location.

1

Attention: The file names you can assign can be quite long but make sure not to exceed the restrictions of the operating system you use (Windows: 234 characters including file type, Mac OS X: 255 characters). Data exchange in the network can also mean that you cannot fully utilize the naming feature that Prinect Signa Station offers. For data transfer with AppleTalk, names are restricted to 31 characters.

Export ... The open and active job including all its elements (i.e. imported PDF files, resources and machine data sets that were used and the job file (.jdf)) are gathered in a folder that is given the job name. This function is primarily intended for servicing. If a job encounters problems, all the parameters needed for an analysis of the job are exported to a folder. This folder can then be sent directly to the service point in charge. You can also use the function to archive your jobs. Close The open job closes after an alert message whether you want to save the job or not. The job disappears from the Browser window.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–7

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Print Job ... To output a job or product part, a print dialog displays where you can define the print setup. Select an output parameter set. You can customize this with "Options". The press sheet list shows you the press sheets in the job. You can find more details about the print dialog in the User's Guide. Preferences ... In the Preferences, you can set parameters that simplify working with Prinect Signa Station. You can save, cancel or reset your settings at any time in the dialog: The following tabs are available for your settings: General, page 4–1 Paths, page 4–6 Names, page 4–8 Defaults, page 4–9 Resources, page 4–13 Import, page 4–14 Processes, page 4–17 Option Chooser, page 4–19

12–8

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Logoff The user currently logged on can log off and a new user can log on. Prinect Signa Station exits when you click the "Exit" button. Quit Exits the Prinect Signa Station program.

Edit Menu Undo You can undo actions with this function. The actions you undo are named in the menu. Up to 10 actions can be undone in an inspector window. You can redo all actions you have undone. See next menu item. Redo The actions you redo are named in "Redo".

Jobs & Resources Menu The "Jobs & Resources" menu lets you go from the active job to the resources and back again. Current Job The open job comes to the front and can be edited. Same function as shortcut "command key + Shift key + 1".

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–9

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Active Job All open jobs are displayed. The active job is marked by a tick. Click a job in this list to enable it for editing. Resources & Machines Opens the path to all available resources and machine data sets. The "Resources" and "Machines" tabs give you an overview of all available resources and machines. You can import "resources" or "machines" to the open and active job using the folder buttons in the relevant inspectors. Display using shortcuts: Resources & Machines: Alt + 2 Plate Templates: Alt +3 Schemes: Alt +4 Marks: Alt +5 Plate Templates Opens the path to the "Plate Templates" resource. Schemes Opens the path to the "Schemes" resource. Marks Opens the path to the "Marks" resource.

Inspectors Menu Display of the different inspectors

12–10

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

An inspector window shows you the settings of the open and selected job. You only see the settings of the inspector that is currently displayed. Shortcut to display the inspector: Job Inspector: Command key +1 Product Part Inspector: Command key +2 Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector: Command key +3 Press Sheet Inspector: Command key +4 Page/1up Inspector: Command key + 5 Document Inspector: Command key +6 Job Inspector More details can be found in Job Inspector, page 9–6. Product Part Inspector More details can be found in Product Part Inspector, page 9–13. Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector The inspector that opens depends on the type of active job ("Imposition" or "Montage"). More details can be found in Folding Sheet Inspector, page 9–54 or in Assembly Block Inspector, page 9–67. Press Sheet Inspector More details can be found in Press Sheet Inspector, page 9–70.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–11

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Page/1up Inspector More details can be found in Page/1up Inspector, page 9–76. Document Inspector More details can be found in Document Inspector, page 9–82.

Tools Menu Background Processes The window shows you the progress of the triggered actions. Some very complex computing processes that affect your computer capacity take place in the background. Open the preview window to view how the background processes are progressing. Show Output Status The window shows jobs sent for output and their current status. You can query the status of very time-consuming jobs (e.g. output via network) or jobs with a large data volume at any time. 0

Active Jobs The first job sent is marked active, the following ones are waiting.

0

Finished Jobs Only canceled jobs or ones that finished with error messages are shown. The job must be

12–12

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

marked to find out the reason for the failure in "Status Message". 0

Status messages Details about the marked print job are displayed. The details can vary depending on your workflow (defined in the output parameter set).

0

Print Next Only applies to "Active Jobs". The priority of job number three and following can be changed to be printed after the active job. This job must be marked.

0

Delete A marked job can be deleted, an active one canceled.

Detach/Include Graphic View To display the graphic view better on your screen, you can detach the window from the normal view. The graphic view then appears as a separate window, giving you a bigger display or making it possible for you to work with two monitors. For more functions, see Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts in Graphic Window, page 2–20. Folding Sheet Animation You can use this function to study existing folding schemes or ones you created yourself in a threedimensional animated graphic. A three-dimensional graphic is computed based on the rules created in the Folding Scheme Editor, showing you the fold direction and what the pages look like when folded.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–13

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

The following functionalities are implemented:

Opens an existing folding scheme. No function. Rotation of the animation. Click the animated graphic while holding down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer. Zoom up graphic is set by default. A "+" appears in the magnifying glass. Hold down the "Alt" key to zoom down. A "-" appears in the magnifying glass. Colored presentation of the single components in the animated graphic (e.g. front and back). Page numbers can be shown or hidden.

12–14

Edition February 2006

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

Starts the automatic animation. Starts the automatic, endless animation. Slider below the animated graphic for manual start. Click the slider while holding down the mouse button and move the mouse pointer to the right.

Services Menu Remote Service The "Remote Service" menu item will assist you if servicing is required. Access is remote in this case. Please ask your local service unit for more details about this service and its availability. The "Remote Service" function allows you to access a customer's computer directly for the purpose of error analysis. Update Prinect Signa Station This function is not yet enabled.

Help Menu Help Starts the context-sensitive Online Help. See also the Help!, page 2–13.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

12–15

Menus in Prinect Signa Station

ABC

About Prinect Signa Station Shows information about the currently installed version and the installed Prinect Signa Station components. Click the About window to close it again. Current User This shows the user currently logged on. You can find more details about User Management in the User's Guide.

12–16

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC 13 Packaging

Introduction This chapter describes only functions that relate to the "Packaging" mode. In the "Packaging" mode, Prinect Signa Station uses a CAD file to layout 1ups on a sheet. The format of the CAD file must be "CFF2" ("Common File Format Revision 2"). This file has ".CF2" as its extension. The CFF2 file defines the cutting die of a 1up. When used in conjunction with packaging, the cutting die is called a "profile". A CFF2 file may contain several profiles, e.g. for different boxes. Requirements 0

0

You have a license for the "Packaging" mode. The "Option Chooser" window displays when Prinect Signa Station first starts. You must set the "Packaging" option in this dialog. See Option Chooser, page 4–19 for details.

Definition of the "Packaging" Mode You can define the "Packaging" mode at the following points in the application: 0

Job Assistant > Product Part Definition

0

Product Part Inspector

Job Assistant in the "Packaging" Mode When you are creating a new job with the Job Assistant, select the "Packaging" mode in the "Product Part Definition" step. The Job Assistant then shows four steps, of which the last one is called "Cutting Die (CFF2)". This step relates specifically to packaging.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–1

Packaging

ABC

The settings in this step are identical to those in the "Packaging" tab in the Product Part Inspector (see the section "Packaging" Tab, page 13–2).

Product Part Inspector in the "Packaging" Mode In the "Packaging" mode, the Product Part Inspector has a "Packaging" tab. "Packaging" Tab Cutting Die File and Main Settings 0

The CFF2 file can be seen in the first text box. Click the folder button to the right of this box to load the CFF2 file. You will find the "PackagingCAD" folder that is created automatically for the CFF2 files in "Preferences > Paths > Workspace". In the graphic window, the profiles of the loaded CFF2 file have green lines.

0

"Same Content for All" When this option is set, all the 1ups of a profile are assigned the same content. In the graphic window, you will see that all the 1ups of a profile have the same white number. The 1ups of the first profile are all numbered "1", those of the second profile "2", etc. When you assign a content to a 1up in a profile, all the 1ups in this profile are automatically given the same content. The 1ups of a profile are numbered consecutively, starting with one ('1'), if the option is not set. In this case, you must assign the contents separately for each 1up.

0

13–2

"Line Type for Clip Path": The default value is "90".

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

All the lines of this type in the CFF2 file are considered clip path lines. This should produce a closed clip path. 0

"Cutting Die Orientation": The cutting die is rotated counterclockwise by the selected angle on the paper.

Information about Loaded CFF2 File ("Info") The following data are read from the loaded CFF2 file and shown: 0

0

0

"Version": Version of the CAD standard (generally "V2" for CFF2). "Info1", "Info2": General information. Frequently, the name and address of the customer are shown. "Design": The first box displays the name of the entire layout. This contains all the profiles in this CFF2 file. Below "Design" you will see the table with all the profiles: 0

0

0

"Profile Name": Name of the profile "Profile Size": This is the size of the bounding box of a 1up. "1up": Number of 1ups in this profile.

You will see the trashcan to the right of the table. You can use this to delete profiles from the table. Deleted profiles are no longer shown in the graphic window. A CFF2 file with many profiles for additional elements can fill up your graphic window. You can delete these profiles to have a better overview of your work.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–3

Packaging

ABC

Placement rule for assigned 1ups This is where you define the placement for all the 1ups of the selected profile. See section Placement rule for assigned pages, page 9–22.

Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector "Attributes" Tab 0

Assembly block parameters (packaging unit) > "Position X" / "Position Y": This allows you to enter the position of the selected assembly block (yellow contour) relative to the press sheet. The bottom left corner of the paper is the zero point for both directions.

The same function is also available in the Press Sheet Inspector. Using the parameters "Position x/y", you can change the position of the selected assembly block relative to the press sheet in this tab as well.

1up Inspector In the "Packaging" mode, the "Attributes" tab in the 1up Inspector displays a "Clip Path" group with the following functions: 0

0

0

13–4

"Set Original": When this option is set, the original clip path from the CFF2 file is set for all the selected 1ups. "Copy": The clip path of the selected 1up is copied. "Paste": A copy of the clip path is pasted for the selected 1ups.

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

0

"Move Corners to Contour": This function is useful if a clip path is a bounding box around the 1up. When this option is set, the four corners of the clip path move in closer to the contour of the CFF2 cutting die of the 1up. In "Distance", you can define a minimum distance from the CFF2 cutting die for these corners. The trim from "1up Inspector > Trim > Left/Right/Bottom/Top" is also taken into account in this value (see the section Rectangular Clip Path, page 13–5).

Editing the Clip Path Rectangular Clip Path You can define a rectangular clip path in "1up Inspector > Trim > Left/Right/Bottom/Top". Polygon Clip Path A clip path may already be defined in the CFF2 file. You can view this clip path in the graphic window. In this case, the line type of the clip path in the CFF2 file must be identical to the type you defined in the Product Part Inspector > "Packaging" tab > "Cutting Die File and Main Settings" > "Line Type for Clip Path". The bounding box of the 1up is used by default as the clip path if a clip path is not defined in the CFF2 file. Requirements for editing the clip path: 0

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

You have a job in the "Packaging" mode The "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab is selected in the graphic window. You have selected a 1up.

13–5

Packaging

ABC

An example of a line is shown below:

Colors used in the line:

1up selected 1up not selected

Clip path

Cutting Die

cyan/blue broken line

magenta

blue

green

The corners of the clip path are indicated by squares. Tool The following tool is available for editing the clip path:

13–6

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

You will see this "pen nib" button at the bottom right in the graphic window > "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab. The pen nib button is enabled with the left mouse button. In this case, the mouse cursor also appears as a pen nib in the graphic window. Remember that you must deselect the pen nib button so that you can use the normal mouse functions again. You can edit the clip path with the pen nib cursor. The pen nib cursor has three modes. You can select them in the context-sensitive menu of the pen nib button. To do this, right-click the enabled pen nib button. You can see which cursor mode is set from the pen nib button. The functions of the three modes will now be described: Pen nib button on in the original. Click a clip path line with the left mouse button. This selects the corners of this line, and you can move this line, highlighted by a red frame, holding down the mouse button. You can also select a single corner by clicking it and move it holding down the mouse button. Press the Shift key if you wish to select several corners. The cursor doesn't change when you do this. Click one of the selected corners with the left mouse button. You can move the entire selected line holding down the mouse button.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–7

Packaging

ABC

Pen nib button with plus sign: The pen nib cursor has a plus sign when it is near the clip path. Click a clip path line with this cursor to set a new corner. You can now move this corner holding down the mouse button. Note: You can also give the pen nib cursor a plus sign by a shortcut. To do this, press the Ctrl key (PC) or the Apple key (Macintosh) on your keyboard. Pen nib button with minus sign: The pen nib cursor has a minus sign when it is near the clip path. You can delete a corner by clicking it with this cursor. The clip path line is drawn between the two remaining corners. Note: You can also give the pen nib cursor a minus sign by a shortcut. To do this, press the Ctrl + Alt keys (PC) or the Apple + Shift keys (Macintosh) on your keyboard. Functions in a 1up Context-sensitive Menu Requirements for displaying the context-sensitive menu are: 0

0

0

13–8

You have a job in the "Packaging" mode The "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab is selected in the graphic window. You have selected a 1up.

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

Right-click the selected 1up to display the contextsensitive menu:

Functions: 0

0

"Clip Path (Packaging)": The first three functions ("Set Original Clip Path", "Copy Clip Path" and "Paste Clip Path") are also available in the 1up Inspector. A description of the functions can be found in the section 1up Inspector, page 13–4. "Clip Path (Packaging) > Define Line Type as Clip Path": The mouse cursor changes to a crosshair when you select this function. You can click any line of the cutting die with this crosshair. This path is defined as the clip path if this line forms a closed path with other lines of the same type. This function saves you having to know and enter the line type as the clip path (see the section Cutting Die File and Main Settings, page 13–2).

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Create New Profile" Select one or more 1ups and then click the "Create New Profile" function. A new profile is then created for the selected 1ups. The new profile is added to the list of profiles (in Prod-

13–9

Packaging

ABC

uct Part Inspector > "Packaging" tab > "Info > Design"). The name of the original profile is used for the new profile with a consecutive number added. The "Create New Profile" function is useful, for example, if you want to assign the 1up contents automatically to several 1ups in a profile (see "Same Content for All" in the section Cutting Die File and Main Settings, page 13–2. Other Functions You can find a description of other functions relating to the clip path in the section 1up Inspector, page 13–4.

Marks The following marks were developed especially for packaging printing: 0

"StationNumber"

0

"InternalMark", cover mark as a job-internal mark

0

"CoverClippath"

0

Ink pickup bar with measurement tool as a jobinternal mark

The "StationNumber" mark can also be used in the "Montage" mode. The job-internal cover mark, "CoverClippath" and the ink pickup bar with measurement tool can be used in all other working modes as well.

13–10

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

"StationNumber" Mark Basically, all 1ups have station number "0" by default. This number, however, cannot be seen at first. Only when you assign "StationNumber" to a 1up can this hidden number be seen. You can assign station numbers to the 1ups. In this way, each 1up can be clearly identified on the press sheet, independently of its content. To benefit from this function, two steps are necessary: 0

0

You must make the station numbers visible. To do this, you must assign the "StationNumber" mark to all 1ups that are to be numbered (see also the section Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up, page 13–12). You must assign the station numbers (see also the section Step 2: Assigning the station numbers, page 13–13). You do this by assigning a numbering sequence to all the 1ups or a group of selected 1ups. You set up the properties of the numbering sequence yourself (see the section "Station Numbers" Dialog, page 13–15). In other words, you can form several groups of 1ups on your sheet, each with different numbering sequences.

The visible station numbers are very small on the screen. You can see the numbers better in one of the following ways: 0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

You can scale up the "StationNumber" mark to 400%, for example. You must then remember to reset the scaling again. You can use the PDF view of the press sheet. To do this, display the context-sensitive menu in the graphic window > "Press Sheet" tab Select "Print

13–11

Packaging

ABC

Press Sheet". Click the press sheet in the list of sheets and then click "View". The "StationNumber" mark is a text mark that contains the "StationNumber" placeholder (see the section Creating a Text Mark, page 11–33 and section Placeholders for Text Marks, page 11–34). You can also create any number of other text marks and assign them the "StationNumber" placeholder. In the next two sections (section Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up and section Step 2: Assigning the station numbers), read how to work with the "StationNumber" mark. Step 1: Assigning the "StationNumber" mark to the 1up Assign the "StationNumber" mark to all 1ups that are to be numbered. You can also assign a custom text mark that contains the "StationNumber" placeholder. Proceed as follows: 1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. 2. Select a 1up (left mouse button). 3. Right-click the selected 1up. Display the Page/1up Inspector from the context-sensitive menu. 4. Assign the "StationNumber" mark to the selected 1up in the 1up Inspector (for details on assigning marks, see the section Marks, page 9–79 and section Marks Resources, page 9–65). Make sure that the mark is in the foreground (the "Foreground" option must be set in the 1up Inspector > "Marks" tab > Expert Mode").

13–12

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

The station number appears as a black digit on the 1up. The "StationNumber" mark appears in the "Marks List". You can scale up the view, for example, to 400% to be able to see the mark better for tests The default station number is "0". 5. Click "Apply to all pages/1ups" to give all the 1ups the "StationNumber" mark. If you have several profiles, the mark is only applied in the profile with the selected 1up. Note: You can also apply the "StationNumber" mark

any inputs made in the "Marks" tab) to a group 2 (plus of selected 1ups. To do this, first select the 1up with the "StationNumber" mark. Then select the 1ups to which the mark will be applied. Click "Apply to selected pages/1ups". This also works if you selected several 1ups in different profiles. See also the Page/1up Inspector, page 9–76. Step 2: Assigning the station numbers In step 2, you must now assign a station number to all the 1ups with the "StationNumber" mark. You can assign station numbers in the folding sheet view and in the press sheet view. Proceed as follows in the folding sheet view: 1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. (2.) This step is necessary if you would like to divide your 1ups into groups with different numbering sequences. Then you must select groups of 1ups that will be assigned a numbering sequence later. Select a 1up by clicking it with the left mouse button while holding down the Ctrl key.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–13

Packaging

ABC

3. Right-click the graphic window. 4. Select "Assign Station Numbers..." from the contextsensitive menu. 5. Set the station numbers to suit your needs (for operation, see the section "Station Numbers" Dialog, page 13–15). You will see the black station numbers in the graphic window. Proceed as follows in the press sheet view: (1.) This step is necessary if you would like to divide your 1ups into groups with different numbering sequences. Then you must select groups of 1ups that will be assigned a numbering sequence later. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window to select your 1ups. Select a 1up by clicking it with the left mouse button while holding down the Ctrl key. 2. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window. 3. Right-click the graphic window. If you selected several 1ups in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab, you must click the area beyond the plate with the right mouse button. If you don't, the selection of 1ups will be lost. 4. Select "Assign Station Numbers..." from the contextsensitive menu. 5. Set the station numbers to suit your needs (for operation, see the section "Station Numbers" Dialog, page 13–15). You will see the black station numbers in the graphic window.

13–14

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

"Station Numbers" Dialog In the "Station Numbers" dialog, you can set the station numbers as you need them. Start this dialog in the graphic window > "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab or "Press Sheet" tab > "Assign Station Numbers..." in the context-sensitive menu.

0

0

"Numeration": This is where you set the number of the first 1up and the increment. "Apply Numbering": 0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"To all 1ups": All the 1ups will be assigned numbers.

13–15

Packaging

ABC

0

"To selected 1ups": Only the selected 1ups will be assigned numbers in ascending order. All other 1ups keep their numbering. In this way, you can group 1ups, all of which have their own numbering sequences. Each numbering sequence starts with the number that you entered in "First Station Number". Each numbering sequence has its own "increment" and its own "variant". You can only set this option if you selected one or more 1ups beforehand in the graphic window > "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab.

0

"Variants": This is where you set the starting point and run direction of the station numbers.

Cover Marks (Job-internal Cover Mark / "CoverClippath") Background Info about Cover Marks Cover marks are used to cover a certain section of the background by an invisible white mask. The background objects lying below this mask then cannot be seen. The "hierarchy" of the various "layers" is listed below to illustrate this: 0

Background

0

Cover mark

0

Page/1up content

0

Foreground

The job-internal cover mark and the "CoverClippath" mark differ in the way that the mask outline is defined.

13–16

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

Example for a cover mark: In packaging printing, the free spaces between the 1ups are used to place marks such as color control bars. The color control bar must be in the background in order for it to be covered by the 1up contents. However, the color control bar can be seen if the 1up contents are transparent. In such a case, you can use the job-internal cover mark, for example. In the first graphic, you can see how the color control bar can be seen below the transparent packaging flap. In the second graphic, this part of the background is covered by the rectangular white mask of the job-internal cover mark. Without cover mark

With cover mark

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–17

Packaging

ABC

Job-internal Cover mark ("InternalMark") This mark only exists as a job-internal mark and can only be a rectangle (for an example, see the graphic "With cover mark" page 13–17). To set this mark, for example, on a press sheet, proceed as follows: 1. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window. 2. Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose size and position are that of the cover mark you want. (To do this, press the command and Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button first). 3. When the rectangle is created, an additional row appears at the bottom of the graphic window. A scroll bar with different icons appears if there is not enough room in the graphic window. Click the left or right arrow to view all the icons one after the other.

4. Click the button that displays as follows:

You have now created a rectangular cover mark. This mark is listed at the following points in the application: 0

0

13–18

In the Browser window > "Jobs" tab in "Internal Marks". In the Press Sheet Inspector > "Marks" tab > "Marks List"

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

(5.) You can define a section of the mark that will be included in imaging without changing the size of the mark. Tips on operation can be found in the section Expert Mode, page 9–63. "CoverClippath" The "CoverClippath" mark can be found as a standard mark in the resources. This mark is set for a selected 1up. If there is a clip path, the area within the clip path is filled white. If there is no clip path, the bounding box of the 1up will be filled white. The special feature of this mark is that the area within every polygonal clip path can be be masked. This makes packaging printing a typical field of application for the mark. To set the "CoverClippath", proceed as follows: 1. Go to the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block" tab in the graphic window. 2. Select the 1up you want to mask (left mouse button). 3. Right-click the selected 1up and then select "Page/1up Inspector" from the context-sensitive menu. 4. Assign the "CoverClippath" standard mark to the selected 1up (for details on assigning marks, see the section Marks, page 9–69 and section Marks Resources, page 9–70). You have now created a white mask for the selected 1up that covers the area within the clip path. (5.) You can define a section of the mark that will be included in imaging without changing the size of the mark. Tips on operation can be found in the section Expert Mode, page 9–63.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–19

Packaging

ABC

(6.) You can apply the mark to all 1ups of the product part. To do this, click "Marks" > "Apply to all pages/ 1ups". Note: You must select the 1up with a double click as

2 the mark size generally corresponds to the 1up. Ink Pickup Bar with Measurement Tool This mark only exists as a job-internal mark.

The size of the mark is dynamic when you create it when you call up the Ink Pickup Bar Editor in the Browser window > "Resources" tab and create an ink pickup bar. In other words, the mark adapts itself to the context (e.g. sujet) in which it is set. By contrast, if you create an ink pickup bar using the measurement tool, you define the size of the mark at the start. The size stays the same when creating the mark, i.e. the mark content must be fitted to the mark size. To create an ink pickup bar with the measurement tool, proceed as follows: 1. Go to the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window. 2. Using the measurement tool, draw a rectangle whose size and position are that of the ink pickup bar you want. (To do this, press the command and Shift keys and create the rectangle holding down the left mouse button. Release the mouse button first). 3. When the rectangle is created, an additional row appears at the bottom of the graphic window and includes the following button:

13–20

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

Click this button. The Ink Pickup Bar Editor opens, displaying the rectangle you created. 4. Create your ink pickup bar and click "Save". You can find a description on how to use the Ink Pickup Bar Editor in the section Ink Pickup Bar Editor, page 11–39. The editor started through the measurement tool differs from the normal Ink Pickup Bar Editor as follows: The "Width" and "Height" boxes are dimmed as the size of the mark cannot be changed. They only show the size of the mark. The height of each color bar is matched automatically if you add or remove additional colors in the "Choose Color Layer" list.

Notes on Generating CFF2 Files The information below is for CAD users who are well versed in Common File Format Revision 2 (CFF2). Example The following example of a CFF2 file will help to explain what has to be considered when creating a CFF2 file so that it works successfully with Prinect Signa Station. The source code listed here receives an artificially inserted line number which is added at the start of the line (not there in normal cases), to enable the line to be referenced in the following description. Example of a CFF2 file: 1

$BOF

2

V2

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

13–21

Packaging

13–22

ABC

3

ORDER

4

Info1:ABCDE

5

Info2:D-12345 Adorf

6

END

7

MAIN,GangRunForm3456

8

UM

9

LL,0,0

10

UR,1030,790

11

SCALE,1,1

12

C,58#T_1,200,206,90,1,1

13

C,58#T_1,410,206,90,1,1

14

C,55#T_1,620,206,90,1,1

15

C,55#T_1,830,206,90,1,1

16

END

17

SUB,58#T_1

18

L,2,1,0,-175,-105,175,-105,2,5

19

L,2,1,0,175,-105,175,105,2,5

20

L,2,1,0,175,105,-175,105,2,5

21

L,2,1,0,-175,105,-175,-105,2,5

22

A,2,1,0,70,0,70,0,0,0,-1,2,5

23

L,2,90,0,-145.00,-85.00,145.00,-85.00,2,5

24

L,2,90,0,145.00,-85.00,145.00,85.00,2,5

25

L,2,90,0,145.00,85.00,-145.00,85.00,2,5

26

L,2,90,0,-145.00,85.00,-145.00,-85.00,2,5

27

END

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

28

SUB,55#T_1

29

L,2,1,0,-115,-45,115,-45,2,5

30

L,2,1,0,115,-45,115,45,2,5

31

L,2,1,0,115,45,-115,45,2,5

32

L,2,1,0,-115,45,-115,-45,2,5

33

L,2,90,0,-145.00,-85.00,145.00,-85.00,2,5

34

L,2,90,0,145.00,-85.00,145.00,85.00,2,5

35

L,2,90,0,145.00,85.00,-145.00,85.00,2,5

36

L,2,90,0,-145.00,85.00,-145.00,-85.00,2,5

37

END

38

$EOF

The lines 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 16 and 38 are obligatory. The lines 4, 5, 8, 9 and 10 are optional. For line 8, the default is "UM" for the unit of measure "mm". For line 9, the default value is "0.0" (in mm) for the bottom left coordinate of the entire form. For line 10, the default value is "1030,790" (in mm) for the top right coordinate of the entire form. Line 11 is ignored. Furthermore, the following specific features apply: 0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

The first two lines with the colon in the ORDER section (lines 4 and 5) are used as "Info 1" and "Info 2". The "Info" data are shown in 0

Job Assistant > Cutting Die (CFF2)

0

Product Part Inspector > "Packaging" tab

Placement of the 1ups requires calls (lines 12--15) and subroutines (SUB sections in lines 17--27 and 28-37) in Prinect Signa Station. All angles are permissible (not only multiples of 90°). Scaling fac-

13–23

Packaging

ABC

tors "1" and "-1" only are allowed. Rotation is applied before scaling. 0

0

0

0

All lines, arcs and texts in the MAIN section are ignored. Line type 46 (dimension) and all texts will be ignored. All elements that are required for cuts on the margin, labeling, etc, but are not part of the actual profile should preferably be located in the MAIN section as they are ignored here (see above). If they are defined in a subroutine, this can cover all 1ups. Then this "superfluous" profile would have to be deleted at the Prinect Signa Station before you can resume your work. Line type 90 is designed as the default clip path for the Prinect Signa Station. This enables the optimum cut to be controlled by the CAD software. There is a default clip path (blue line) going beyond the trim box of the 1up by the preset trim value.

Browser Window The display of product parts for jobs in the "Packaging" mode is different in the Browser window > "Jobs" tab. The new elements are:

13–24

0

"1up List" (instead of "Page List")

0

"Cutting Die" (instead of "Folding Sheets")

Edition February 2006

Packaging

ABC

Overview: Changes in the "Packaging" Mode The Prinect Signa Station UI was modified for the "Packaging" mode at the following points in the application: 0

Job Assistant 0

0

0

0

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Additional working mode "Packaging" The last step in the "Packaging" mode is called "Cutting Die (CFF2)"

Product Part Inspector 0

Additional working mode "Packaging"

0

Additional tab "Packaging"

Browser Window > "Jobs" tab > Product Part: "Cutting Die" and "1up List" are found here. The Assembly Block Inspector displays in the inspectors window if the Folding Sheet / Assembly Block Inspector is called up. Page/1up Inspector: "Clip Path" input section

13–25

Sheet Optimization

ABC 14 Sheet Optimization

Introduction Sheet optimization gives you additional functions in the "Montage" working mode. If you have different types of 1ups, you must first create an assembly block for each type that will be duplicated later. This assembly block that you will duplicate is referred to as master label in the text below. A number of different master labels can automatically be placed optimally on the press sheet with the help of various algorithms. Optimization depends on certain input data that you yourself define. This chapter describes only those functions that relate to sheet optimization. Sheet optimization is set mainly in the Press Sheet Inspector (see the section Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector:, page 14–3). The results of the data you entered are shown there and in the list window. The graphic window shows you how the sheets are positioned on the press sheet. You will find examples of how to handle sheet optimization in the User's Guide in "Examples of Sheet Optimization".

Requirements for Creating a Job with Sheet Optimization 0

You have bought the option for sheet optimization and enabled it. You must set the "Sheet Optimizer" option in the "Prinect Signa Station Option Chooser" dialog. Proceed as follows to go to the dialog: 0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Prinect Signa Station launches the first time and the dialog displays automatically.

14–1

Sheet Optimization

ABC

0

0

0

Go to "File > Preferences" > "Option Chooser" tab.

When you create a job with the Job Assistant, select the "Montage" working mode and enable "Sheet Optimization on" in "Montage Mode Specification". You can enable sheet optimization subsequently for an existing Montage job. To do this, enable "Sheet Optimization on" in the "General" tab in the Product Part Inspector.

Creating Master Labels A master label is the equivalent of an assembly block. You can create master labels in the following ways: 0

When creating a job with the Job Assistant: In the last step "Assembly Blocks", you can define new master labels in "Current Assembly Block". This is where you can also delete master labels or change their properties.

0

0

In the Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector > "Attributes" tab: This is where you can create and delete master labels or change their properties. With drag-and-drop in the Browser window > "Contents" tab: You selected the "Press Sheet" tab in the graphic window. Go to the Browser window > "Contents" tab and load the file for the master label you wish to create. A new master label with the content you want is created when you drag-and-drop this file to the press sheet in the graphic window.

14–2

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

0

In the graphic window > "Press Sheet" tab, rightclick the press sheet and then select "Create new assembly block" from the context-sensitive menu. The new master label is placed at the bottom left of the press sheet. Its default size is 100 x 70 mm.

Sheet Optimization in the Press Sheet Inspector: Go to the Press Sheet Inspector > "Press Sheet" tab. "Sheet Optimization" Group This is where you set the parameters relating to the press sheet. This includes the start of an automatic optimization run, during which the assembly blocks are arranged automatically on the press sheet. 0

"Sheet Optimization > Left Margin / Right / Bottom Margin / Top": By defining these margins, you create a bounding box within which the assembly blocks can be positioned. If you leave the default values of "0" as they are, the bounding box is the same size as the paper. By entering values for the margins, you shrink the size of the bounding box accordingly. If you set marks at the left, right and top, you must set a margin for these marks. You must always define a margin at the bottom for the gripper margin.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Sheet Optimization > Ribbon Margin": A ribbon is made up of a series of assembly blocks the same size placed side by side. A ribbon does not have to be rectangular (see graphics on optimization as of page 14–6).

14–3

Sheet Optimization

ABC

To be able to cut the ribbons better later on, you can define a margin that is placed around each ribbon automatically during an optimization run. Only one margin is set as a boundary at places where two ribbons abut each with a margin. For example, if you set the "Ribbon Margin" to 2 mm, the distance between abutting ribbons is still 2 mm and not 4 mm. The graphic below is taken from the graphic for "horizontal" optimization, page 14–6. In this graphic, the ochre (light) and magenta (dark) 1ups each form a ribbon. "Ribbon Margin" was set to 4 mm to illustrate this clearly. This is the distance between the two light-green lines (gray at the 1up) that limit the 1ups. A trim was also defined for all the 1ups. This is portrayed by the light-blue line (gray between the 1ups). There is room for the trim only if the ribbon margin is large enough. A trim would project into the neighboring 1ups if you have 1ups with a trim without a ribbon margin or with one that is too small. The trim is reduced automatically by the required amount if this happens.

14–4

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

"Ribbon Margin" Graphic

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Automatic rotation": If set, assembly blocks can be rotated during optimization. In this way, you can utilize your paper better. Optimize: You can start three different functions for sheet optimization with buttons beside this option. During optimization, the assembly blocks are grouped by size. Assembly blocks of the same size placed side by side make up what is known as a "ribbon". If possible, the bigger assembly blocks are always positioned more to the left. Positioning always begins at the bottom left.

14–5

Sheet Optimization

ABC

Graphic of "Horizontal" Optimization

0

"Horizontal": Sheet optimization is in horizontal ribbons. The ribbons begin at the bottom left. They always fill the entire space between the margins before a new ribbon begins.

Graphic of "Vertical" Optimization

14–6

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

0

"Vertical": Sheet optimization is in vertical ribbons. The ribbons begin at the bottom left. They always fill the entire space between the margins before a new ribbon begins.

Graphic of "General" Optimization

0

"General": Sheet optimization is in rectangles (or rectangular ribbons). In other words, assembly blocks of the same size are grouped together to form rectangles if possible. The rectangle begins at the bottom left. In most cases, the rectangular ribbons don't fill the entire space between the margins.

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Paper Usage": After sheet optimization, this box shows in percent the paper usage for the entire number of press sheets. The surplus is not taken into account in this calculation. This means that the requested number of 1ups is used for calculation.

14–7

Sheet Optimization

ABC

0

0

"Per Sheet": After sheet optimization, this box shows in percent the paper usage for each press sheet. The surplus is taken into account in this calculation. This means that the number of assembly blocks you really have is used for calculation. We will also use the term "sheet usage" for this factor in the descriptions below. "Print Volume": Number of press sheets required. This box is for entering and displaying data. After an optimization run, the minimum number of press sheets required is calculated and shown. You can then change the value to suit your needs.

"Assigned Folding Sheets/Assembly Blocks" Group This is where you set the parameters for the separate master assembly blocks. 0

"Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List": Only the master labels are shown before the first optimization run. The master label is the assembly block you will make copies of. All labels generated are found in this list after an optimization run. All the labels will be assigned consecutive numbers.

0

0

0

14–8

"Name": Name of the selected label. You can select a master label in the list above it (see above) in the graphic window or in the Browser window. "Number of Copies" (for master labels only): Number of copies of the selected master label for the entire print volume. "(Number of Copies) Per Press Sheet" (for master labels only): Number of copies of the selected master label for one press sheet. This is a read and write box.

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

After an optimization run, this box suggests the minimum number of copies per press sheet to you. You can then type in a higher value if necessary. Hit the Tab key or click another input box to trigger the function. Surplus 1ups are shown off the press sheet if the value is too high. 0

"Priority" (for master labels only): The reason for assigning priorities is that print quality drops going from left to right. You can use priority to define that the most important 1ups are printed the most accurately. The smaller the number, the higher the priority. In optimization, copies of the master label with the highest priority are positioned first if possible, beginning at the bottom left. If two labels have the same priority, then the bigger label is positioned more to the left or more to the bottom. Priority is assigned automatically when a master label is being created. Priority is assigned in the order the master labels are created. By default, priority is assigned in steps of 10. This means the first master label is automatically given priority "10", the second "20", the third "30", etc. The reason for this is that the label layout can also be optimized by changing priorities. It's then easy if there are many values in between that are not yet assigned. You can change a priority at any time. Values from "-10000" to "10000" are permitted.

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

"Position X / Y": This is where you can manually change the position of one or more selected labels. "Orientation": This is where you can manually change the orientation of one or more selected labels.

14–9

Sheet Optimization

ABC

Report Display in the List Window The following columns are recommended in the list window > "Folding Sheet" tab:

0

"1up Count": This is the number of 1ups in the total number of press sheets. 0

0

0

0

„14“: Calculated number of labels per press sheet. „72“: Calculated number of press sheets. „1008“: Calculated number of 1ups in the total number of press sheets.

"Surplus": In this example, 1000 copies were requested for each master label. This results in a surplus of 8 copies in the total number of press sheets for each master label.

Creating a Report You can print the table from the list window or save it as a HTML file. The report is automatically given a report header. By default, a standard report header is set that is not suited to sheet optimization. In other words, you must first set the correct report header. Proceed as follows:

14–10

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

1. Go to "File > Preferences > Resources". 2. Click the folder icon beside "Report Header". 3. Select "ReportHeaderLabelOptimization_us.html" from the list. 4. Click "Open". 5. Click "Save" in the preferences. You can now print the report. 6. Right-click the table. 7. You can print the table ("Print Table") or create a report using the report header ("Save table as HTML file").

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

14–11

Sheet Optimization

ABC

Concept for Optimization Procedure Basically you can optimize your labels in two ways. The first step is automatic optimization. This gives you a result that you probably would like to optimize further manually in a second step. Both optimization types are detailed below. Automatic Optimization We are in the Press Sheet Inspector > "Press Sheet" tab. Set all your parameters as you need them and trigger an optimization run by clicking "Horizontal", "Vertical" or "General" next to "Optimize". All three algorithms ("Horizontal", "Vertical" or "General") calculate optimization with the minimum surplus possible for the 1ups. The calculated surplus is required to ensure the required total number of 1ups. Manual Optimization Generally, you must think of the first, automatic optimization run as a suggestion that you can customize to meet your requirements. Often, the press sheet still has spaces that can be filled with more labels. These spaces were deliberately not filled automatically so that you can decide how you would like to use them. Especially in cases where there is a great difference between the numbers of 1ups required (e.g. label 1 is to have 20,000 copies and label 2 400,000 copies), more spaces tend to be created than with numbers that are relatively the same.

14–12

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

At this point, you can now decide for yourself what you want to do with these spaces. In other words, you can continue with other optimization steps that are specially tailored to your needs. There are basically two procedures: 0

0

You can fill the spaces by increasing the number of copies per press sheet for the various labels. By doing this, you create an "artificial" surplus that is not necessary to produce the required total number of labels. However, this surplus might match your own special needs. You can reduce the label layout by moving the labels around so that you may only need a smaller paper size. You then also have the option of replacing the plate template and, if necessary, using a smaller plate. See List of Selected Plates, page 9–38 for details. Even without moving the labels, the choice of a smaller paper or plate template can be a good idea if the margins on the left, right and/or top are large enough.

You might consider the following criteria for manual optimization: 0

0

0

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Do you want to save paper? In this case, at the cost of other criteria, you can try to keep the print volume as small as possible and get a maximum out of paper usage. Do you want a surplus for some labels? In this case, you can achieve excellent sheet usage. How important is it for you to have just a few steps? To what extent does the layout of the labels have to match the cut specifications? If you prefer cutting to be easy, then accept that your sheet usage may be less than optimal.

14–13

Sheet Optimization

ABC

Functions for Manual Optimization We are in the Press Sheet Inspector > "Press Sheet" tab. The following functions are part of subsequent manual optimization: 0

Increase the number of copies of a master label per press sheet in "Per Press Sheet: Select a master label in the "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block List" and enter the number of copies you want for this label in "Per Press Sheet". The action is done when you go to another box with a mouse click or using the Tab key. Then a new optimization is determined for the press sheet using the quantity you entered. All the labels are automatically re-arranged with the new optimization data such as "sheet usage". You cannot achieve this result with an automatic optimization run as only the minimum number of required labels is generated in this case (see the section Automatic Optimization, page 14–12).

0

Copy labels: Select one or more labels that you would like to copy. Right-click in the graphic window and then select "Duplicate Assembly Block" from the context-sensitive menu. The copies of the labels lie on top of the original labels. You must position them manually, i.e. you must move them (see "Move labels").

0

Move labels: Select the labels you wish to move. You can position a group of selected labels in one of the following ways: 0

14–14

You enter the correct position in the "Position X / Y" box.

Edition February 2006

Sheet Optimization

ABC

0

0

0

You move the mouse cursor to the yellow frame of the group. The cursor changes to a hand cursor. You can now move the selected objects while holding down the mouse button. You hit an arrow key. A single hit moves the objects by the amount you set as the default in "File > Preferences > Defaults > Arrow Keys". If you hold down the mouse button, one movement follows the next automatically, and with increasing speed.

Delete labels: Select one or more labels: Right-click in the graphic window and then select "Delete folding sheet/assembly block" from the context-sensitive menu.

0

Fit marks and bleeds: You may have to fit the marks and bleeds if some manual changes altered the label layout. Rightclick in the graphic window and then select "Fit Marks and Bleeds" from the context-sensitive menu. 0

0

Marks: The sujet-related marks are fit if, for example, the size of the sujet changes. Generally, the cut marks also have to be matched. Bleeds: The bleed of a label is always handled as follows: The margins at which the labels abut are not given a bleed. This means that the labels are lined up for a separation cut. Only bare margins have a bleed. For example, if you place a label that was surrounded by adjacent labels on its own on a space, this label doesn't have a bleed. The "Fit

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

14–15

Sheet Optimization

ABC

Marks and Bleeds" function allows you to give the label a matching bleed.

Important Terms at a Glance 0

0

0

0

0

14–16

Sheet usage: Value in the "Per Sheet" box in the Press Sheet Inspector > "Press Sheet" tab (see page 14–8). Master label: A master label is the 1up that you will copy and is equivalent to an assembly block. Automatic optimization: See section Automatic Optimization, page 14–12. Manual optimization: See section Manual Optimization, page 14–12. Handling trims: See section Fit marks and bleeds:, page 14–15.

Edition February 2006

Drag & Drop

ABC 15 Drag & Drop

What's Behind Drag-and-Drop In Prinect Signa Station many steps are made simple by dragging-and-dropping items. In Prinect Signa Station, this technique is suited to a fast and visual placement or pasting of files, pages or marks in an active job. First the source is marked (files, pages or marks). You can recognize a marked object by its yellow background. Then, with the left mouse button (on PC) held down, the elements are dragged from the source and dropped in the target. The elements are added to the position you are in when you let go of the mouse button. At the target, the mouse pointer changes from a "no go" sign to a box with a pointer. The pointer indicates that dragging-and-dropping is possible at your selected target.

The following tables will show you the drag-and-drop options open in Prinect Signa Station that will make your work much easier.

Using Drag-and-Drop The target window for drag-and-drop in Prinect Signa Station is generally the graphic window, with the Browser window and list window as source windows. When working with marks, you can also position them directly from the Browser window to the relevant inspectors.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

15–1

Drag & Drop

ABC

You can click certain pages, resources, files and marks and position them in the graphic window at the position you want in the active job. The following tables show you how you can use dragand-drop in Prinect Signa Station: General From the Browser Window to the Graphic Window

From / To

Graphic window

Press Sheet "Browser Window > Product Parts"

Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block Page List

Press Sheet List

Document

-

Folding Sheet

X

-

-

-

-

Assembly Blocks

X

-

-

-

-

PDF file (all of it)

X

X

X

X

-

PDF pages (single or several)

X

X

X

X

"Browser Window > Contents"

15–2

Edition February 2006

Drag & Drop

ABC

From the List Window to the Graphic Window

From / To

Graphic window

Press Sheet "List Window > Assigned"

Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block Page List

Press Sheet List

Document

-

-

PDF file (all of it)

X

X

X

X

PDF pages (single or several)

X

X

X

X

"List Window > Not assigned"

-

PDF file (all of it)

X

X

X

X

PDF pages (single or several)

X

X

X

X

-

Marks From the Browser Window to the Inspectors Window You can place marks directly from the Browser window to the "Marks" tab in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet Inspector or Page Inspector. The advantage of this is that the marks reference is defined exactly (plate, folding sheet or page):

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

15–3

Drag & Drop

ABC

From / To

Inspectors Window "Press Sheet > Marks"

"Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block > Marks"

"Pages/1ups > Marks"

X

X

X

"Browser Window > Internal Marks" Internal Marks

From the Inspectors Window to the Graphic Window You can place marks directly from the "Marks Resources" tab in the Press Sheet Inspector, Folding Sheet Inspector or Page Inspector to the graphic window. The advantage of this is that the marks reference is also defined exactly (plate, folding sheet or page), depending on which inspector the mark comes from:

From / To

Graphic window "Press Sheet"

"Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block"

"Press Sheet List"

X

X

X

X

X

X

"Press Sheet Inspector > Marks Resources" Marks "Folding Sheet/Assembly Block Inspector > Marks Resources" Marks "Page Inspector > Marks Resources"

15–4

Edition February 2006

Drag & Drop

ABC

From / To

Graphic window

Marks

"Press Sheet"

"Folding Sheet/ Assembly Block"

"Press Sheet List"

X

X

X

Files from the Operating System to the Browser Window You can drag PDF files and Prinect Signa Station jobs (.sdf) directly from the operating systems (Explorer on PC, Finder on Mac) to the Browser window. The PDF files appear in the "Browser > Contents" tab. Prinect Signa Station jobs (.sdf) appear in the "Browser window > Product Parts" tab. The operating systems must be seen in the foreground so that you can select a file. Then drag the selected file to the Browser window of Prinect Signa Station that is opened in the background.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

15–5

Quality Assurance

ABC 16 Quality Assurance

Quality Assurance If problems occur with the hardware or software, please contact one of our local branches or your Heidelberg agency. Central Call Desk If problems occur, customers within Germany should contact our Central Call Desk at (0 18 03) 23 23 33. In the event of breakdowns, the downstream service control station will arrange for an engineer to be sent out if necessary. If you are outside Germany, please contact your Heidelberg agency. The Central Call Desk is available Monday to Friday between 7 am and 6 pm. Your inquiries will be dealt with straight away. Answering questions after expiration of the guarantee period is a service that can only be provided if you purchase a Heidelberg Infoline Box. The same applies for telephone consultations in the event of breakdowns, or for operator-specific problem analyses. Problem Report for Customers and Service Engineers Please use the attached Problem Report if you are experiencing basic faults with the product or if you require improved hardware or software. Do not use the Problem Report for questions on use or operation of machines. For these kind of questions, please contact your Heidelberg agency, the branch responsible for your region or our Central Call Desk. Make a copy of the form before you fill it out so that you have a copy to use in the future.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

16–1

Quality Assurance

ABC

Note: Always give the serial number or the service

of the product with which you are experienc2 number ing problems. Enter the exact product names (machine description, software and version). Only describe one problem per form. Please also give the precise area of the problem, for example error messages, serial or service number of the machine, date of last modification, software and version used, etc. Please give us your full address, customer number and, if possible, telephone number, fax number and email address. Send the Problem Report to your branch or Heidelberg agency.

16–2

Edition February 2006

ABC Glossary

1up The number of identical objects to be created on the same piece of material. In a 2up, the page appears twice. The page appears four times in a 4up. The application incorporates all the changes you made to a page when you create one or more 1ups. For example, trim marks or page-related marks are Back plate The back of a press sheet. Binding The binding fastens the sheets of a printing job. Binding (e.g. saddlestitching or perfect binding) influences the folding scheme. If you use perfect binding, Prinect Signa Station uses the highest and lowest pages to calculate the exact position for the remaining pages. Use "Product Part Inspector > Binding" to select the binding mode. Bleed Area that is defined beyond the page size. This avoids white "flashes" by page elements that are printed up to the edge of the page. Bleed is generally 3 mm per side margin. Clip path In packaging printing, a clip path runs around a 1up. A rectangular clip path is defined by means of the trim. You can also have polygonal clip path that may be defined in the CFF2 file. Collating mark A collating mark is a control mark printed in the back margin between the first and last pages of a folded sheet. For each following signature, the collating mark is printed lower by its own length. The collating CFF2 file In packaging printing, the format of the CAD file must be "CFF2" ("Common File Format Revision 2"). The CFF2 file defines the cutting die of a group of 1ups of the same kind. It may also contain the definition for a polygonal clip path of the 1ups.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

ABC

CIP3 The data format specified by the CIP3 consortium is known as the "Print Production Format" (PPF). The file extension is ".ppf". CIP3-PPF files are in ASCII format. CIP4 The "Job Definition Format" (JDF) was introduced as a further development of well-known technologies such as PPF and PJTF (Adobe Portable Job Ticket Format). The JDF is based on the XML data format. JDF combines the job ticket specifications with a message description standard and a message interchange protocol. The file extension is ".jdf". The PPF data are a subset in a JDF file. Creeping In books with saddlestitch binding, the paper bulk pushes the innermost pages outward, that is, away from the spine of the book. After the binder has trimmed the book, the innermost pages have a narrow margin at the edge opposite the spine. The margin for the outermost pages is wider. This is set in "Product Part Inspector > "Binding". EPSF Encapsulated PostScript File. A file containing structured PostScript commands and comments. Folding mark This marks the position where a fold will be made. It can be set automatically or manually. Automatic positioning of the folding marks is set in the "Product Part Inspector > Binding". Folding scheme In the folding scheme, you define the number and arrangement of the placeholders for the pages on the press sheet and the folding rule. No dimensional data are defined in a folding scheme. You define a folding scheme with the Folding Scheme Editor. You assign the folding scheme in the "Imposition" or "Autom. Imposition" working modes. You assign it when creating a job in the Job Assistant > "Folding Schemes" or in the "Product Part Inspector > Schemes".

Edition February 2006

ABC

mark can be used to do a visual check that all signatures have been printed and that they are in the correct order. Prinect Signa Station uses the number of front sheets to calculate where and between which two-page spreads to position the collating mark. Use the "Product Part Inspector > Binding" to select automatic positioning for the collating mark. Front Face Refers to the front of a signature. Gap In Prinect Signa Station, the spacing between the pages within an folding scheme is known as a gap. In label printing, you must create a gap if the colors of the 1ups do not allow a separation cut. Gripper Margin The margin used by the grippers of the printing machine to feed in the printing sheet. The width of the gripper margin varies depending on the printing machine. A gripper margin of 10mm (0.5in) is normal. The gripper margin is taken into account automatically in Prinect Signa Station. Imposition Corresponds to the term "folding scheme" (see below). Scheme Master label In sheet optimization, a master label is the label that you will copy and is equivalent to an assembly block. Master page type The master page type can be a right page, left page or a special master page. Different master pages are required when the trimmed size differs in the scheme (special master page) or when the trim boxes of the assigned PDF documents are not uniform (left page, right page). Origin The reference point for a system of coordinates. By default, Prinect Signa Station uses the lower left corner as the origin / reference point for the dimensions you enter.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

ABC

Page content Content is the term used in this documentation to describe a PDF page's content as supplied by the application, i.e. with marks and clippath if applicable. Page Marks Marks that refer to the assembled or imposed pages of a signature. Placing mode The placing mode determines the rules for generating the reverse side of printing. The following placing modes are used in Prinect Signa Station: Single-sided, work-and-turn, work-and-tumble, perfector and sheetwise. Perfect binding A binding method in which adhesive material is used for binding the pages. Books using perfect binding can be opened out fully. Use "Product Part Inspector > Binding" to set perfect binding. copied to all the other 1ups. In Prinect Signa Station, the 1up can be set in "Assembly Block Inspector > Copies X/Y". Parallel Fold Each fold is parallel to the previous fold. Perfector Tumbling refers to rotating the printing sheet about its vertical axis after printing the front sheet. After the printing sheet is tumbled, the lay edge changes. The rear edge then becomes the gripper edge. Perfector must be defined if you are imposing front and back. In Prinect Signa Station, the placing mode can be set in "Product Part Inspector > Plates". Pixel The short form for picture element. A pixel is the smallest visible element that can be used for creating digital data. The pixel is therefore the building block for image reproduction in a data processing system. The resolution is defined as the number of pixels per unit of area.

Edition February 2006

ABC

PostScript PostScript (PS) is an image description language that describes the contents of a page. A wide range of imagesetters are capable of interpreting PostScript. Profile In packaging printing, a profile is the cutting die of a group of 1ups of the same kind. A CFF2 file may contain several profiles, e.g. for different boxes. Product Part Is one part of the job. You can save the "Imposition", "Autom. Imposition" and "Montage" working modes as a product part in one job. The product part in turn can also consist of several parts such as the press sheets, folding sheets and/or data pages if they were filed in a page list. Register mark A mark used to align the printing forms. If the paper is not cut exactly at right-angles, the register mark is important for the register of the press sheet. Register is the exact alignment of both the color separations and the position of the printed matter on the front and the back of the press sheet. In other words, the register mark defines the horizontal and vertical alignment of the printed pages. Routing margin The routing margin defines the page margin that will be beveled to get a "smooth" gluing edge in perfect binding. Saddlestitch Printed matter with saddlestitch binding is bound by binding a staple through the gap fold. For printed matter with saddlestitch binding, the exact position of the assembled pages depends on both the imposition scheme and the size of the job. This can be taken into account when selecting the binding mode in the Prinect Signa Station. If saddlestitch is selected in the "Product Part Inspector > Binding", the application automatically pairs up the highest and the lowest page numbers and then calculates the exact position for each page.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

ABC

Signature Refers to a a press sheet in the Signastation Classic (e.g. version 9.0). Sujet Sujet is the term for the bounding box around the printed area on the press sheet. Separation cut The separation cut separates two juxtaposed pages with a single cut. A separation cut can be used to separate two pages with tints or trim allowances. By placing the pages side by side on a separation cut line, you can trim both pages together. A separation cut is often used in label printing to save material. Sheetwise After printing the front sheet, the printing sheet needs to be turned. Turning describes the rotation of the printing sheet about its horizontal axis. In contrast to tumbling, turning the printing sheet leaves the gripper edge at the lay edge and moves the page mark from left to right. Sheetwise must be defined if you are imposing front and back. In Prinect Signa Station, the placing mode can be set in "Product Part Inspector > Plates". Surfaces One or two surfaces can be defined for a press sheet (front or front and back). The surfaces are defined in the Product Part Inspector > "Plates" tab > "Placement rule for perfecting". Trim Paper margin projecting beyond the end size. After printing, this margin is cut off on all sides to have a clean-cut end product. Trimmed size The trimmed size is the size of the cut page after printing. The trimmed size is equivalent to a trim box defined in Acrobat.

Edition February 2006

ABC

Trim box A PDF document can have a trim box. The size of the PDF trim box is the same as the trimmed size at Prinect Signa Station. A trim box is also always defined at Prinect Signa Station. The size of this trim box is defined when Prinect Signa Station imports the PDF document and evaluates the PDF bounding boxes.

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Index

ABC Index 1up 9-69 1up Definition 9-69

A

Acrobat Distiller 9-82 Active Layer 9-76 Administrative Data 9-6 All Folding Sheets 9-46 Apply changes 9-55, 9-65, 9-73, 9-75, 9-81 Assembly Block 9-72 Assembly Block Inspector 9-3, 9-67 Assembly Block Parameters 9-67 Assign special master pages 9-45 Assigned folding sheets 9-72 Assigning a name 9-70 Attributes 9-54, 9-67, 9-76 Autom. Imposition 9-16 Automatic gap computation 9-36 Automatic placement of print control marks 9-32 Available colors 9-10, 9-82, 9-84

B

Baseline 9-72 Binding 9-2, 9-24 Binding Methods 9-24 Block name 9-67 Bottling 9-47 Browser Window 6-1 Contents 6-9, 6-12 Jobs 6-2 Resources 7-2

C

Center offset 9-71, 11-10 Centered output 11-6 Centering 9-70 CIP4 11-57 Clipping region 9-63 Collate 9-35 Collating mark 9-32, 9-60 CollatingMark 9-34 Color 9-57, 9-60 Color Definitions 9-10 Color Table 9-10 Colors 9-9 Colors for automatic marks 9-34

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Come & Go 9-25 Come & Go Two Books 9-26 Comment 9-17 Copies X/Y 9-68 Created by/Modified by 9-9 Created on/Modified on 9-9 Creating a Text Mark 11-33 Creeping 9-28, 9-79 Inner 9-30 On 9-30 Outer 9-30 Creeping values from paper definition 9-29 Current Scheme 9-44 Current Type 9-19 Custom trim and extra space 9-22 Customer ID 9-7 Customer name 9-7 Cut and stack 9-27 Cut marks 9-32, 9-60

D

Data for Collating Mark 9-34 Definition 9-2, 9-14 Direction, ascending - descending - zigzag 9-35 Distance Automatic - Defined 9-34 Document 9-82 Document Inspector 9-4, 9-82 Drag & Drop 15-1 Usage 15-1

E

Edit Product Part 5-2 Editor Color control bar 11-41 Customer data 11-48 Filmsetter and platesetter 11-62 Folding scheme 11-9 HTML 11-59 Ink pickup bar 11-39 Marks 11-29 Marks Import 11-45 Output Parameter Set 11-48 Page and Paper Sizes 11-47 Paper 11-46

Index

ABC

Plate layout 11-48 Plate templates 11-2 Sheetfed Presses 11-64 Special color control bar 11-43 User data 11-59 Web Presses 11-64 Even pages on right 9-28 Expert Mode 9-55, 9-63, 9-75, 9-80, 9-81

F

Fill sheet 9-68 Fold Assistant 11-16 Fold Assistant / folding sheet animation 11-22 Folding marks 9-32, 9-60 Folding rule 11-16, 11-17 Folding Sheet 9-44, 9-46, 9-54, 9-72 Folding Sheet Data 9-54 Folding Sheet Inspector 9-3, 9-54 Form 9-57

G

Gap automatic 9-45 Gap computation 9-36 Gap width 9-22, 9-36 Gaps 9-45, 9-55 and master pages 9-45 X/Y 9-68 Graphic window Documents 8-28 Folding Sheet/Assembly Block 8-16 Graphic View 8-1 Page List 8-22 Press Sheet 8-1 Press Sheet List 8-25 Gripper Fold Front 9-36 Gripper Fold Rear 9-36 Gripper Margin 9-36 Saddlestitcher 9-35 Group 9-47 creating 9-46 Group/name 9-60

H

Head gap 9-36 History 9-9 Hotspot 9-56

Hotspot XY 9-57

I

Icon 9-56 Image Setting Imaging Window 11-6, 11-63 Start of imaging with tiles 11-9 Imposition 9-15 in mark 9-11 Inspector Assembly Block 9-67 Document 9-82 Folding Sheet 9-54 Job 9-6 Pages/1ups 9-76 Press Sheet 9-70 Product Part 9-13 Inspectors Details in them 9-1 Parameters in Prinect Signa Station 9-5 When do I use what? 9-6

J

Job Your first job 4-22 Job and customer 9-6 Job Assistant 5-1 Edit Product Part 5-2 New Job 5-2 Order of steps 5-4 Procedure 5-3 Start 5-1 Job Details 9-8 Job Inspector 9-1, 9-6 Job name 9-7 Job Notes 9-9 Job number 9-6

L

Label Optimization Automatic Optimization 14-12 Manual Optimization 14-12 Report 14-10 Layer 9-8, 9-57 Layers Working with Several Layers 8-12 Layout 9-33 Left page 9-19

Edition February 2006

Index

ABC

List Window 10-1 Assigned 10-9 Folding Sheet 10-5 Not assigned 10-12 Page List 10-6 Press Sheet 10-2

M

Machines 7-14 Magnetic fields, influence on the monitors XXIII Management Data 9-70 Margin 9-57, 9-68 Mark Type 9-57 Marks 9-55, 9-69, 9-73, 9-79 Color control bar 11-41 Creating a Text Mark 11-33 Grayscale 11-40, 11-43 Hotspot 11-29 Ink coverage 11-40, 11-42, 11-43, 11-44 Ink pickup bar 11-39 Mark Type 11-29 Marks Import 11-45 Marks on plate template 11-6 Placeholders for marks 11-34 Special color control bar 11-43 Tiling marks 11-9 Marks colors and collating values 9-34 Marks List 9-56, 9-73, 9-79 Marks Resources 9-65, 9-70, 9-75, 9-81 Master page types 9-18 Master Pages 9-2, 9-18 MDS (Master Data Store) 4-17 Measuring Tool 9-64, 9-77 Menus 12-1 Edit 12-9 File 12-1 Help 12-15 Inspectors 12-10 Window 12-12 Mixed Binding 9-27 Modify product part 9-14 Monitor, installation XXIII Montage 9-16 Mouse and Keyboard Shortcuts 2-17

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Move folding sheets 9-47 Multiple assignment of a 1up 6-8

N

Name 9-72 New Job 5-2 No Rule 9-27 Notes on using marks 9-33 Number of layers 9-8

O

Offset 9-57 Offset/scaling with the arrow keys 9-78 On 9-79 Orientation 9-72, 9-84 Output 9-10, 11-50 Centered output 11-6 Orientation of the press sheets 11-51 Output folder for jobs 11-50 Output Parameter Set Editor 11-48 Output parameters in the plate template 11-6 Override automatic trim 9-20

P

Packaging CAD file 13-1 CFF2 file 13-2, 13-21 CFF2 format 13-1 Clip path 13-4, 13-5 Cover marks 13-16 CoverClippath 13-19 Cutting Die 13-1 StationNumber 13-11 Page 9-83 Page Assignment (only for the "Imposition" mode) 9-42 Page Names 9-18 Page total 9-15 Page/1up Inspector 9-4, 9-76 Functions 9-77 Pages in product part 9-18 Placeable 9-42 Unplaced 9-43 Paper 9-71, 9-73, 9-75 Paper definition in the plate template 11-4

Index

ABC

Paper Editor 11-46 Paper Definition 9-41 Paper width / paper height 9-71 Parameters for automatic gap computation 9-36 Parent 9-57, 9-75 Paste blank page 6-8 PDF settings 9-82 Perfect binding 9-25 Perfector 9-40 Placeable Pages 9-42 Placeholders for marks 11-34 Placement rule for assigned 1ups 9-69 for assigned page/1up 9-77 for assigned pages 9-22 for perfecting 9-40 Placing mode 9-40 Plate 9-73, 9-75 Plate templates 9-39, 11-4 Plate width / height 9-70 Plates 9-2, 9-38 Position X/Y 9-63, 9-68, 9-72, 9-76 PostScript document 9-82 Preferences 4-1 Defaults 4-9 General 4-1 Import 4-14 Names 4-8 Option Chooser 4-19 Paths 4-6 Processes 4-17 Resources 4-13 Press Sheet 9-70, 9-71 Press Sheet Inspector 9-4, 9-70 Press Sheet Parameters 9-71 Prinect Signa Station Basic Packages 4-20 Options 4-21 Printing plate 9-44 Process calibration 11-52 Product Part Inspector 9-2 Punches 11-55 Reference punch 11-55 Push Together 11-14

R

Reference Point 9-56, 9-61 Rel. position X/Y 9-83 Report header 4-14 Resources 7-2 Right page / Left page 9-19

S

Saddlestitch 9-25 Scale X/Y 9-84 Scale/orientation 9-63 Scheme 9-47 Standard scheme name 11-27 Scheme display 9-55 Schemes 9-3, 9-42 Selected 9-81 Selected Mark 9-60, 9-75 Selected Plate Template 9-39 Sheet optimization Bar 14-3 Master labels 14-2 Priority 14-9 Trim 14-4 Sheetwise 9-41 Signature name 9-70 Single-sided (no back) 9-40 Perfector 9-40 Sheetwise 9-40 Special angle 9-69 Special master page 9-19 creating 9-20 Sujet 9-73, 9-75 Surfaces 9-56, 9-73

T

Template 9-71 Tiling 11-53 Extra space 11-53 Start of exposure 11-9 Tiling marks 11-53 Trim 9-69, 9-77 Custom trim and extra space 9-22 Custom values 9-22 in label optimization 14-15 Page-related 9-21 Trim Allowance for Pages 9-22 Trim box 9-83

Edition February 2006

ABC

Trimmed size 9-18, 9-76 Types 9-18

U

Unplaced pages 9-43 Used colors 9-71 User Interface 2-1 Four basic windows 2-4 Menu bar 2-3 Toolbar 2-3

Prinect Signa Station – Reference

Index

Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG Kurfuersten-Anlage 52–60 69115 Heidelberg Germany Phone +49 (62 21) 92-00 Fax +49 (62 21) 92 69 99 www.heidelberg.com/ For further information please contact your local Heidelberg representative.

Antisthenes der Sokratiker. Das literarische Werk und die Philosophie, dargestellt am Katalog der Schriften (PhD Heidelberg)

Verhandlungen des dritten Internationalen Mathematiker- Kongresses in Heidelberg vom 8. bis 13. August 1904

Machine Translation and the Lexicon: Third International EAMT Workshop, Heidelberg, Germany, April 26-28, 1993. Proceedings

Artifizielle Reproduktion und gleichgeschlechtliche Elternschaft: Eine arztrechtliche Untersuchung zur Zulässigkeit fortpflanzungsmedizinischer ... Heidelberg und Mannheim)

ACM International Conference on Distributed Systems Platforms Heidelberg, Germany, November 12-16, 2001, Proceedings

Network and Operating System Support for Digital Audio and Video: Second International Workshop, Heidelberg, Germany, November 18-19, 1991. ... Oceedings

Intramurale Medizin Gesundheitsfürsorge zwischen Heilauftrag und Strafvollzug (Veröffentlichungen des Instituts für Deutsches, Europäisches und Internationales ... Heidelberg und Mannheim) (German Edition)

Current Developments in Knowledge Acquisition - EKAW'92: 6th European Knowledge Acquisition Workshop, Heidelberg and Kaiserslautern, Germany, May ... Proceedings

Die rechtliche Organisation kollektiver Patienteninteressen (Veröffentlichungen des Instituts für Deutsches, Europäisches und Internationales Medizinrecht, ... Heidelberg und Mannheim)

Quantum Probability and Applications, V: Proceedings of the Fourth Workshop, Held in Heidelberg, FRG, Sept. 26-30, 1988

Security in Ad-hoc and Sensor Networks: First European Workshop, ESAS 2004, Heidelberg, Germany, August 6, 2004, Revised Selected Papers

Strafrechtliche Produktverantwortung bei Arzneimittelschäden: Ein Beitrag zur Abgrenzung der Verantwortungsbereiche im Arzneiwesen aus strafrechtlicher ... der Universitäten Heidelberg und Mannheim, 31)

Mathematical Theory and Computational Practice: 5th Conference on Computability in Europe, CiE 2009, Heidelberg, Germany, July 19-24, 2009, ... Computer Science and General Issues)

Social Security as a Human Right: Drafting a General Comment on Article 9 ICESCR - Some Challenges (Veröffentlichungen des Instituts für Deutsches, Europäisches ... der Universitäten Heidelberg und Mannheim)

Heterologe Insemination - Die rechtliche Stellung des Samenspenders: Losungsansatze zur rechtlichen Handhabung (Veroffentlichungen des Instituts fur Deutsches, ... der Universitaten Heidelberg und Mannheim) German

Disks and Outflows Around Young Stars: Proceedings of a Conference Honouring Hans Elsässer Held at Heidelberg, Germany, 6-9 September 1994 (Lecture Notes in Physics 465)

Research and Education in Robotics -- EUROBOT 2008: International Conference, Heidelberg, Germany, May 22-24, 2008. Revised Selected Papers (Communications in Computer and Information Science, 33)

Medizinische Forschung mit Kindern und Jugendlichen: nach schweizerischem, deutschem, europaischem und internationalem Recht (Veroffentlichungen des Instituts ... Heidelberg und Mannheim) (German Edition)

Urkunden des Politeuma der Juden von Herakleopolis (144 3-133 2 v. Chr.) (P. Polit. Iud.). Papyri aus den Sammlungen von Heidelberg, Köln, München und Wien (Papyrologica coloniensia 29)

Dark Matter in Astrophysics and Particle Physics 1998: Proceedings of the Second International Conference on Dark Matter in Astro and Particle Physics, held in Heidelberg, Germany, 20-25 July 1998

Heidelberg Prinect Signastation